Getting Started
Please read this guide before operating this product.
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.
ENG
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030
Getting Started
Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals.
• Precautions for Using Your Machine and Settings Required after
Machine Installation
• Quick Reference for Basic and Useful Operations
• Maintenance and Troubleshooting
• Frequently Asked Questions and Answers
• Windows Printer Driver Installation and Instructions
• Mac Printer Driver Installation and Instructions
The Mac UFR II Driver Guide and the Mac PS Driver Guide
• Windows Fax Driver Installation and Instructions
• Windows Network ScanGear Installation and Instructions
$%30.
Guides with this symbol are included on the accompanying CD-ROM. (See footnote on the
next page.)
Getting Started
(This Document)
$%30.
Quick Reference
$%30.
Maintenance Guide
$%30.
Frequently Asked Questions
$%30.
Printer Driver Installation Guide
$%30.
Mac Printer Driver Guide
$%30.
Fax Driver Installation Guide
$%30.
Network ScanGear Installation Guide
$%30.
• Comprehensive Manual for Basic Operations and Handling Your
Machine
e-Manual
$%30.
- Before You Start Using This Machine
- How to Use This Manual
- Basic Operations
- Optional Products
- Settings/Registration
- Problem Solving
- Maintenance
- Practical Workflows
- Copy
- Fax
- Scan and Send
- Scan and Store
- Access Stored Files
- Fax/I-Fax Inbox
- Secured Print
- Web Access
- Scanner
- Quick Menu
- Status Monitor/Cancel
- Print
- Network
- Remote UI
- MEAP
- Security
- Software
To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is required. If Adobe Reader/Acrobat Reader/Acrobat is not installed on your system, please download it from the Adobe
Systems Incorporated website (http://www.adobe.com).
How This Manual Is Organized
Chapter 1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Chapter 2
Flow of Settings
Chapter 3
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
Chapter 4
Before Connecting to a Network
Chapter 5
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
Chapter 6
Using a TCP/IP Network
Chapter 7
Using a NetWare Network (Windows)
Chapter 8
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
Chapter 9
Using an AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)
Chapter 10
Before Using the Advanced Box
Chapter 11
Before Using the Fax Function
Chapter 12
Before Printing from Computers
Chapter 13
Before Sending Faxes from Computers
Chapter 14
Before Using the Remote Scan Function
Chapter 15
Managing the Machine from a Computer
Chapter 16
Appendix
Includes the index.
Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, if you need an exact specification, please
contact Canon.
Contents
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
How To Use This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Symbols Used in This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Displays Used in This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Illustrations Used in This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Abbreviations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Legal Notices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Product Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
FCC (Federal Communications Commission). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Laser Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
International Energy Star Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
IPv6 Ready Logo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Copyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Third Party Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
The Software Licensed under Open Source Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Disclaimers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Users in the U.S.A.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Users in Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Utilisation au Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Super G3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Important Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxix
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiii
Telephone Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
Other Warnings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxiv
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv
Checking the Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxv
Check Sheet for the Periodic Inspection of the Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
Chapter 1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Installation Location and Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Select a Safe Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Moving the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Backing Up/Exporting Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
External View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Internal View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Control Panel Parts and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Main Power and Control Panel Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
How to Turn ON the Main Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Shutting Down the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Chapter 2
Flow of Settings
What This Machine Can Do. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Operations Required to Use the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Confirm the Following Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Logging In to the Machine as an Administrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Sending E-Mail/I-Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Sending Data to a File Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Using the Advanced Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Directly Sending Faxes from the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Remote Fax Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sending Faxes from a Computer via the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Printing from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Using the Machine as a Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Managing the Machine from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Chapter 3
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
Using System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Using the System Options That Require License Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Obtaining the License Key/License File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Registering the License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Installing the License File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Obtaining the License File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Installing the License File and Application File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Installing from Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Installing from SMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Starting Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Chapter 4
Before Connecting to a Network
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Printing or Sending a Fax from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Optional Equipment Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Using E-Mail/I-Fax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Optional Equipment Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Sending Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Optional Equipment Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Checking Your Network Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Sample Windows Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Sample Macintosh Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sample UNIX Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Using a Network with Various Types of Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Chapter 5
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
Network Environment Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Connecting to a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Connecting to a USB Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Touch Panel Display Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Communication Environment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Chapter 6
Using a TCP/IP Network
TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
TCP/IPv4 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
TCP/IPv6 Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Startup Time Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
vi
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
FTP Server Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
UNIX/Linux. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Mac OS X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
WebDAV Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
IIS for Windows 2000/2000 Server/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Apache for Windows 2000/2000 Server/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X . . . . . . 6-39
Chapter 7
Using a NetWare Network (Windows)
NetWare Network Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chapter 8
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
SMB/CIFS Network Setup Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
TCP/IP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
SMB and WINS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Connecting to a TCP/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Connecting to an SMB/CIFS Network and Configuring a Shared Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Samba (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Chapter 9
Using an AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)
AppleTalk Network Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Chapter 10
Before Using the Advanced Box
User Access Control for Advanced Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Advanced Box Open to Public Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Using a WebDAV/SMB Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Setting the Authentication Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Chapter 11
Before Using the Fax Function
Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Setting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Selecting the Type of Telephone Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Registering the Sending Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Setting the Current Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Registering Your Machine's Fax Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Registering the Unit's Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Registering Sender Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Remote Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Server-Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Specify Whether to Send Faxes from the Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Forwarding Client Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Client-Side Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Remote Fax TX Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Remote Fax RX Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Chapter 12
Before Printing from Computers
Installing the Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Setting Up the Printer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
For Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
For Mac. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
vii
Other Software Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Chapter 13
Before Sending Faxes from Computers
Installing the Fax Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Setting Up the Fax Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
For Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Chapter 14
Before Using the Remote Scan Function
Installing the Scanner Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Settings Required Prior to Remote Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Chapter 15
Managing the Machine from a Computer
System Requirements for Using the Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Before You Start the Remote UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Enabling the Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
System Requirements for Using SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Before Starting SMS (Preparations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Enabling the Machine to be Accessed from Web Browsers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Chapter 16
Appendix
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Counter Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Print Log List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Device Information Delivery Destination List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Device Information Communication Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Send Job List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Fax Multi TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Fax RX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Activity Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Fax Activity Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Forwarding Conditions List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Address Book List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Store Log Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
User’s Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Color Image Reader Unit-B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Color Image Reader Unit-B2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Paper Deck Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Inner Finisher-A1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Staple Finisher-C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-25
Booklet Finisher-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-27
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
Inner 2 Way Tray-F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-30
Copy Tray-J1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-30
Card Reader-C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
Super G3 FAX Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
viii
Send Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Network Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Hardware Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Software Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Software Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Provide Adequate Installation Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-35
CANON imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030 SERIES LIMITED WARRANTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-36
TERMS OF imageWARE REMOTE SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-37
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-38
Number of Enterable Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-38
Settings/Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-38
Capacity of Various Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40
Settings/Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-41
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-42
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45
ix
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030. Please read this manual thoroughly before
operating the machine to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual,
store it in a safe place for future reference.
How To Use This Manual
Symbols Used in This Manual
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that
should be observed for safety.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed
correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons, or damage to property if not
performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the
machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine.
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these
notes is highly recommended.
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key/button names are a few examples of how keys and buttons to be clicked or pressed are expressed
in this manual:
• Control Panel Keys:
Example:
Key Icon (Key Name)
(Start)
(Stop)
• Touch Panel Display Keys:
Example:
[Key Name]
[Cancel]
[Close]
• Buttons on Computer Operation Screens: [Button Name]
[OK]
Example:
[Add]
Displays Used in This Manual
Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when the following optional equipment is attached to
the imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 : the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1, Super G3 FAX Board, Inner Finisher-A1, and Cassette
Feeding Unit-AD1.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are not displayed on the touch panel display.
The keys or buttons which you should click or press are marked with a
, as shown below.
When multiple buttons or keys can be clicked or pressed, they will be highlighted and mentioned in the order in which they
should be clicked or pressed.
Screen shots used in this manual may differ from the ones you actually see.
On the Network screen, press [Confirm Network
Connection Set. Changes] specify the following.
Press this key for operation.
xi
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 has the following optional
equipment attached to it: the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1, Super G3 FAX Board, Inner Finisher-A1, and Cassette Feeding
Unit-AD1.
Abbreviations Used in This Manual
Microsoft Windows 2000:
Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional:
Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server:
Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows Server 2003:
Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows XP:
Windows XP
Microsoft Windows XP Professional:
Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows Vista operating system: Windows Vista
xii
Microsoft Windows Server 2008:
Windows Server 2008
Microsoft Windows operating system:
Windows
Novell NetWare:
NetWare
Apple Macintosh:
Macintosh
Apple Mac:
Mac
Trademarks
MEAP and the MEAP logo are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, Mac, Mac OS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
Windows, Windows logo, Windows Vista, and Windows Vista logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593; 6,754,382;
7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item refers to a
printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems
Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
xiii
The PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.
Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as defined by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item refers to a
printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed by Adobe Systems
Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
xiv
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual
This machine makes effective use of memory to perform print operations efficiently. For example, as soon as the machine has
scanned the original that you want to copy, it can immediately scan the next person's original. You can also print from this
machine, using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these operations take place in a complex way, so that not
only copies, but also various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their turn before they can be printed.
To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms "scanning," "printing," and "copying," used throughout this manual,
are defined below. When making a copy, the process of scanning originals and printing copies may be described as separate
functions.
Scanning
Scanning an original to be copied,
scanning an original to be sent, or
scanning an original to be stored as
data in the machine.
Printing
Outputting a copy, outputting data stored in
the machine, or outputting data sent from
the computer to the machine.
xv
Copying
Printing data scanned from an original,
followed by finishing options, such as
stapling.
xvi
Legal Notices
Product Name
Safety regulations require the product's name to be registered. In some regions where this product is sold, the following name(s)
in parenthesis may be registered instead.
- imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045 (F154100)
- imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/C5030 (F154300)
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate, radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the Operator's Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his
own expense.
Use of shielded cables are required to comply with Class A limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If you make such changes
or modifications, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
If your equipment malfunctions, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer from whom you purchased the equipment (if
under warranty), or with whom you have a servicing contract. If you are not sure who to contact, and have both purchased and
are using the equipment in the U.S.A., please refer to the "SUPPORT" page on Canon U.S.A.'s Web site (http://www.usa.canon.com).
xvii
Laser Safety
This product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class I laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and
Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968.
Also, this product is certified as a Class I laser product under IEC60825-1: 1993 and EN60825-1: 1994. This means that the product
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam
cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Do not remove protective housings or external covers,
except as directed by the equipment's manual.
The label shown below is attached to the paper drawer's right cover and toner supply port cover.
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the manuals for this machine may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
International Energy Star Program
As an ENERGY STAR ® Partner, Canon USA, Inc. has determined that this machine meets the international
ENERGY STAR ® Program for energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR ® Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes
energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The program backs the
development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption.
It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily. The targeted products are
office equipment, such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos
are uniform among participating nations.
xviii
IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1established by the
IPv6 Forum.
Copyright
Copyright 2009 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying and recording, or by any information storage or retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.
Third Party Software
A. This product includes third-party software modules. Use and distribution of this software modules (the “SOFTWARE”) are
subject to conditions (1) through (9) below.
(1)
You agree that you will comply with any applicable export control laws, restrictions or regulations of the countries involved in the event that
this product including the SOFTWARE is shipped, transferred or exported into any country.
(2)
Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE. Except
as expressly provided herein, no license or right, expressed or implied, is hereby conveyed or granted by rights holders of the SOFTWARE to
you for any intellectual property of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.
(3)
You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the Canon product you purchased (the “PRODUCT”).
(4)
You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior written consent of rights
holders of the SOFTWARE.
(5)
Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign all of your rights to the PRODUCT and all rights
and obligations under the conditions to transferee and (b) such transferee agrees to be bound by all these conditions.
(6)
You may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the SOFTWARE to human readable form.
(7)
You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE.
(8)
You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.
(9)
The human-readable portion (the source code) of the SOFTWARE is not licensed to you.
B. In case this product includes software modules and/or related documentations made by Adobe Systems Incorporated, use and
distribution of software modules and/or related documentations (the “ADOBE SOFTWARE”) are subject to conditions below in
addition to (1) through (9) above.
The ADOBE SOFTWARE is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct 1995), consisting of “commercial
computer software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept 1995).
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users shall
acquire The ADOBE SOFTWARE with only those rights set forth herein.
C. Notwithstanding A and B above, in case the other conditions accompany third-party software modules including open source
software, these software modules are subject to the other conditions.
xix
The Software Subjected to the Other Conditions
Please refer to e-Manual on a CD-ROM bundled with this product, for more detail and corresponding license conditions.
The Software Licensed under Open Source Licenses
If you need source code of certain open source, under respective Open Source Licenses, used for this product, please send email
in English or Japanese at: <oipossg@canon.co.jp>
Please refer to e-Manual on a CD-ROM bundled with this product, for more detail and corresponding license conditions.
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS
PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL,
STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.
For CA, USA only
The following applies in California, USA only:
The battery included with your product contains Perchlorate Material and may require special handling.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
xx
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned, printed or
otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive
list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of using
your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or
otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
• Paper Money
• Money Orders
• Certificates of Deposit
• Postage Stamps
• Travelers Checks
• Food Stamps
• Passports
• Immigration Papers
• Identifying Badges or Insignias
• Internal Revenue Stamps
• Selective Service or Draft Papers
• Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
• Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
• Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness
• Stock Certificates
• Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of
(canceled or uncanceled)
(canceled or uncanceled)
Copyright Owner
■ To Avoid Unauthorized Use of the Machine
Unauthorized copies can be prevented by using the key switch unit to manage the operation of the imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/
C5035/C5030. The use of this key should be strictly supervised.
Security Key
When using the machine, insert the security
key into the key switch unit, and then turn it to the right.
xxi
Users in the U.S.A.
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 16, "Appendix," in the paper version of this guide for specific
dimensions and weight.
B. Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used. If the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board or Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is
installed, a multi telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) can be used.
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which should be installed by the telephone company. If the RJ11-C wall jack is not present,
telephone/facsimile operation is not possible.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company's business representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or an
equivalent one. Use one line per unit. If the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board or Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is installed, you can use a multiline.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-orIDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated
extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without "Call Waiting" can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not
recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a facsimile
error.
C. Power Requirements
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three-wire grounded outlet only.
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause "electrical noise." Air conditioners,
electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this sort generate electrical noise that often interferes with communications
equipment and the sending and receiving of documents.
Connection of the Equipment
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear panel of this
equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If
requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all
areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as
determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that
has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be
connected to the telephone network or premise wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subject to state
tariffs.
xxii
In Case of Equipment Malfunction
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in this guide or the e-Manual, disconnect
the equipment from the telephone line cable and disconnect the power cord. The telephone line cable should not be reconnected
or the main power switch turned ON until the problem is completely resolved. Users should contact their local authorized Canon
Facsimile Service Dealer for the servicing of equipment.
If your equipment malfunctions, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer from whom you purchased the equipment (if
under warranty), or with whom you have a servicing contract. If you are not sure who to contact, and have both purchased and
are using the equipment in the U.S.A., please refer to the "SUPPORT" page on Canon U.S.A.'s Web site (http://www.usa.canon.com).
Rights of the Telephone Company
If this equipment imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030 causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone company also retains the right to make changes in facilities and
services that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such changes are necessary, the telephone company is required to
give adequate prior notice to the user. However, if advance notice is not possible, the telephone company will notify the customer
as soon as possible. Also, the customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint with the FCC if he/she believes it is
necessary.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to
send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each
transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other
entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity,
or individual.
To program this information into your machine, complete the procedure for registering your name, unit's telephone number, time, and date in
“Chapter 11” in this guide. (For instructions on entering characters, see e-Manual > Basic Operations.)
Users in Canada
Preinstallation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 16, "Appendix," in the paper version of this guide for specific
dimensions and weight.
B. Order Information
1.
A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used. If the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board or Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is
installed, a multi telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) can be used.
2.
Order a CA11A modular jack which should be installed by the telephone company. If the CA11A jack is not present, installation cannot
occur.
3.
Order a normal business line from your telephone company's business representative. The line should be a regular voice grade line or an
equivalent one. Use one line per unit. If the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board or Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is installed, you can use a
multi-line.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
or
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas
xxiii
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A dedicated
extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit without "Call Waiting" can be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not
recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a facsimile
error.
C. Power Requirements
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be independent from copiers,
heaters, air conditioners, or any electric equipment that is thermostatically controlled. The rated value is 115 volts and 15 amperes.
The CA11A modular jack should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.
Notice
• This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
• Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases,
the company's inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector
assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not
prevent deterioration of service in some situations.
• The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone
interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the
sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
• The REN of this product is 1.0.
• Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier.
Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications
company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
• Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and
internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural
areas.
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority,
or electrician, as appropriate.
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class A limits.
xxiv
Utilisation au Canada
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L'installation d'un Télécopieur Canon
A. Emplacement
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment solide et de taille appropriée (voir le chapitre 15, Annexe (Appendix),
pour les indications de poids et dimensions).
B. Installation téléphonique
1.
Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions) doit être utilisée. Si le Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board ou le Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax
Board en option est installée, il est possible d'utiliser une ligne téléphonique multiple (tonalités ou impulsions).
2.
Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera installé par la compagnie téléphonique. Sans ce jack, la mise en place serait impossible.
3.
Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez une ligne d'affaires normale de qualité téléphonique courante ou équivalente. Prenez
un abonnement d'une ligne par appareil. Si le Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board ou le Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board en option est installée, il
est possible d'utiliser une ligne téléphonique multiple.
Ligne automatique interurbaine
ou
Ligne automatique internationale
(si vous communiquez avec les pays étrangers)
Canon vous conseille d'utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme aux normes industrielles, à savoir: ligne téléphonique 2500 (pour appareil
à clavier) ou 500 (pour appareil à cadran/impulsions). Il est également possible de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système téléphonique à
poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes émettent des signaux d'appel non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de perturber le
fonctionnement du télécopieur.
C. Condition d'alimentation
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre à trois branches, du type simple ou double, et qui ne sert pas à
alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un climatiseur ou tout autre appareil électrique à thermostat. L'alimentation doit
être de 115 volts et 15 ampères. Pour faciliter l'installation, le jack CA11A doit être assez proche de la prise de courant.
Remarques
• Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Industrie Canada.
• Avant d'installer cet appareil, l'utilisateur doit s'assurer qu'il est permis de le connecter à l'équipement de la compagnie de
télécommunication locale et doit installer cet appareil en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se peut qu'il faille
étendre la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne individuelle d'abonné, qui a été installée par la compagnie, au moyen d'un jeu de
connecteurs homologués (rallonge téléphonique).
• L'attention de l'utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect des conditions mentionnées ci-dessus ne constitue pas une
garantie contre les dégradations de qualité du service dans certaines circonstances.
xxv
• L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une
interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule
condition que la somme d'indices d' équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.
• Le nombre d'équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est 1.0.
• Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être faites par une société d'entretien canadienne autorisée par le Gouvernement
canadien et désignée par le fournisseur. Toute réparation ou modification que pourrait faire I'utilisateur de cet appareil, ou tout
mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de télécommunication le droit de débrancher I'appareil.
• Pour sa propre protection, I'utilisateur doit s'assurer que les prises de terre de I'appareil d'alimentation, les lignes téléphoniques
et les tuyaux métalliques internes, s'il y en a, sont bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est particulièrement importante
dans les zones rurales.
Au lieu d'essayer de faire ces branchements eux-mêmes, les utilisateurs sont invités à faire appel à un service d'inspection faisant
autorité en matière d'électricité ou à un électricien, selon le cas.
Respecte les limites de la classe A de la NMB-003 du Canada.
Super G3
Super G3 is a phrase used to describe the new generation of fax machines that use ITU-T V.34 standard 33.6 Kbps*
modems. Super G3 High Speed Fax machines allow transmission times of approximately 3 seconds* per page which
results in reduced telephone line charges.
* Approximately 3 seconds per page fax transmission time based on CCITT/ITU-T No.1 Chart, (JBIG, Standard Mode)
at 33.6 Kbps modem speed. The PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem
speeds or slower, depending on telephone line conditions.
xxvi
Important Safety Instructions
Please read these "Important Safety Instructions" thoroughly before operating the machine. As these instructions are intended
to prevent injury to the user or other persons or destruction of property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also, since it
may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual. Improper
operation or use of this machine could result in personal injury and/or damage requiring extensive repair that may not be covered
under your Limited Warranty.
Installation
• Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact
with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, it
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power
cord from the power outlet. Then, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids
xxvii
• Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations subject to excessive
vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
• Never block the ventilation slots and louvers on the machine. These openings are provided for proper ventilation of working parts
inside the machine. Blocking these openings can cause the machine to overheat. Never place the machine on a soft surface, such
as a sofa or rug.
• Do not install the machine in the following locations:
- A damp or dusty location
- A location near water faucets or water
- A location exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location near open flames
• Do not remove the machine's leveling feet after the machine has been installed, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over,
resulting in personal injury.
xxviii
Power Supply
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as
this could cause electrical damage and result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power cord coating to melt, resulting in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
• Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Insert the power plug completely into the power outlet, as failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or
otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you
will be unable to unplug it in an emergency.
xxix
Handling
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. There are high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the
machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• If the machine makes strange noises, or gives off smoke, heat, or strange smells, immediately turn OFF the main power switch, and
disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use of the machine
in this condition may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays comes into contact with the electrical components
inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• To avoid damage to the power cord and creating a fire hazard, always turn OFF the main power switch, and unplug the interface
cable when moving the machine. Otherwise, the power cord or interface cable may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the power outlet if the machine was moved. Do not use the machine while
the connection is loose, as doing so may cause a fire.
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or flammable
substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area
inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately
turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as they may tip over or fall resulting in personal injury.
• Close the feeder/platen cover gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal injury.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen cover when using the platen glass to make copies of thick books. Doing so may
damage the platen glass and result in personal injury.
• Do not touch the finisher while the machine is printing, as this may result in personal injury.
• Paper that has just been output from the machine may be hot . Be careful when removing or aligning paper from the output tray.
Touching paper right after it is output may result in low-temperature burns.
• Turn OFF the control panel power switch for safety when the machine will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight.
Also, turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord for safety when the machine will not be used for an
extended period of time, such as during consecutive holidays.
xxx
• Do not place your hands, hair, clothing, etc., near the exit and feed rollers. Even if the machine is not in operation, your hands, hair,
or clothing may get caught in the rollers, which may result in personal injury or damage if the machine suddenly starts printing.
• Do not place your hands in the part of the tray where stapling is performed (near the rollers) when a finisher is attached, as this
may result in personal injury.
Inner Finisher-A1
Staple Finisher-C1/Booklet Finisher-C1
• The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.
Read the following remarks and instructions for safety.
• Never open covers other than those instructed in the manuals for this machine.
• Do not remove the following caution label which is attached to the machine. If the label has been removed, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
• If the laser beam escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to your eyes.
• Controlling, adjusting, or operating the machine in ways not mentioned in the manuals for this machine may cause dangerous
radiation to escape from the machine.
xxxi
Maintenance and Inspections
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, then disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins
and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period
of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This may cause a short
circuit and result in a fire.
• Clean the machine using a slightly dampened cloth with a mild detergent mixed with water. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint
thinner, or other flammable substances. Check detergent for flammability prior to use. If flammable substances come into contact
with a high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting
the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may
result in burns or electrical shock.
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite,
resulting in burns or a fire.
• Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the power outlet after cleaning the machine. Do not use the machine while
the connection is loose, as doing so may cause a fire.
• Check the power cord and power plug regularly. If the following conditions occur, contact your local authorized Canon dealer, as
the condition may cause a fire:
- There are burn marks on the power plug.
- The blade on the power plug is deformed or broken.
- The power goes OFF and ON when the power cord is bent.
- There are cuts, cracks, or indentations on the power cord.
- A part of the power cord becomes hot.
• Check the power cord and power plug regularly to make sure that they are not handled in the following manner, as this may result
in a fire or electrical shock:
- The connection part of the power plug is loose.
- Stress is being applied to the power cord by a heavy object or by affixing it with staples.
- The power plug is loose.
- The power cord is tied in a bundle.
- The power cord protrudes into a walkway.
- The power cord is in front of a heater.
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when
inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or electrical
shock.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not expose yourself to the heat emitted from the
fixing unit and its surroundings for a prolonged period of time. Doing so may result in low temperature burns, even though you
did not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings directly.
• If a paper jam occurs, follow the directions on the touch panel display to remove any jammed paper from inside the machine. Do
not insert your fingers into any parts not indicated on the touch panel display, as doing so may result in personal injury or burns.
DO NOT TOUCH.
It may cause burns.
xxxii
• When removing jammed paper or replacing the toner cartridge, take care not to allow the toner to come into contact with your
hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing
them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on
the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately
with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• When loading paper or removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the originals or
paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the
inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing a used toner cartridge, remove the cartridge carefully to prevent the toner from scattering and getting into your
eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a
physician.
• Do not dismantle the toner cartridge, as doing so may cause toner to fly out and enter your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your
eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• If toner escapes from the toner cartridge, make sure not to ingest the toner or allow it to directly touch your skin. If toner touches
your skin, wash it away with soap and water. If your skin still feels irritated after washing it, or you ingest toner, consult a doctor
immediately.
Consumables
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite,
resulting in burns or a fire.
• Do not store toner cartridges or copy paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner or paper to ignite,
resulting in burns or a fire.
• When discarding used toner cartridges, put the cartridges into a bag to prevent the toner remaining inside the cartridges from
scattering, and dispose of them in a location away from open flames.
• Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
• Do not dismantle the toner cartridge, as doing so may cause toner to fly out and enter your eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your
eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• If toner escapes from the toner cartridge, make sure not to ingest the toner or allow it to directly touch your skin. If toner touches
your skin, wash it away with soap and water. If your skin still feels irritated after washing it, or you ingest toner, consult a doctor
immediately.
xxxiii
Telephone Equipment
When using telephone equipment incorporated into this machine, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce
the risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this machine where there is a potential for contact with water or other liquid.
2. Do not use the telephone equipment during an electrical storm, as there may be a remote risk of electrical shock from
lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Other Warnings
For cardiac pacemaker users:
This product emits low level magnetic flux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from the
product and consult your doctor.
xxxiv
Periodic Inspection of the Breaker
This machine has a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current. Make sure to test the breaker once or twice a month
using the following procedure.
• Make sure that the main power is turned OFF, before inspecting the breaker.
• If a malfunction occurs after an inspection, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Checking the Breaker
1
Push the test button on the rear of the machine with the tip of a ball-point pen, or a similar object.
Briefly push the test button.
• The breaker is located on the rear of the machine.
• For more information on the location of the breaker, see “External View,” on p. 1-10.
xxxv
2
Confirm that the breaker lever is switched to the OFF (“ ” side) position.
ON
OFF
( side)
( I side)
• Do not use the test button to turn the power ON and OFF.
• If the breaker lever does not switch to the OFF (“ ” side) position, repeat step 1.
• If the breaker lever does not switch to the OFF (“ ” side) position, despite carrying out the above procedure two or three times, contact
your local authorized Canon dealer.
3
Switch the breaker lever to ON ("I" side).
ON
( I side)
xxxvi
OFF
( side)
4
Press the main power switch to the ON ( "I" side) position.
5
Fill in the check sheet, located on the next page, to document your periodic inspections of the
breaker.
xxxvii
Check Sheet for the Periodic Inspection of the Breaker
Copy this page for future use, and store it in a safe place near the machine to document your periodic inspections of the breaker.
■ How to Inspect the Breaker Periodically
Follow the procedure described in “Periodic Inspection of the Breaker,” on p. xxxv, once or twice a month.
■ How to Fill in This Check Sheet
Fill in the date of inspection and the name of the inspector.
When the inspection is completed successfully, write a check mark under " ."
If not, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. (Also, write a check mark under "X.")
Date of
Inspection
xxxviii
Inspector
Result
X
Date of
Inspection
Inspector
Result
X
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
$)"15&3
This chapter describes what you should know before using the machine.
Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Backing Up/Exporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Shutting Down the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-1
Installation Location and Handling
This section describes precautions for installation location and handling. We recommend that you read this section prior to using
this machine.
Installation Precautions
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations
■ Avoid locations subject to temperature and humidity extremes, whether low or high.
For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters, humidifiers, air conditioners, heaters, or stoves.
■ Avoid installing the machine in direct sunlight.
If this is unavoidable, use curtains to shade the machine. Be sure that the curtains do not block the machine's ventilation slots or louvers, or
interfere with the electrical cord or power supply.
1-2
Installation Location and Handling
■ Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful.
Ozone may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that
the room be appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates.
■ Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted.
■ Avoid locations near volatile or flammable materials, such as alcohol or paint thinner.
Installation Location and Handling
1-3
■ Avoid locations that are subject to vibration.
For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Avoid exposing the machine to rapid changes in temperature.
If the room in which the machine is installed is cold but rapidly heated, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine. This may
result in a noticeable degradation in the quality of the copied image, the inability to properly scan an original, or the copies having no printed
image at all.
■ Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic equipment.
Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can adversely affect the operation of such equipment.
■ Avoid installing the machine near televisions, radios, or similar electronic equipment.
The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception. Insert the power plug into a dedicated power outlet, and maintain as
much space as possible between the machine and other electronic equipment.
1-4
Installation Location and Handling
■ Do not remove the machine's leveling feet.
Do not remove the machine's leveling feet after the machine has been installed. If you put weight on the front of the machine while the
drawers or units within the machine are pulled out, the machine may fall forward. To prevent this from happening, make sure that the
machine's leveling feet are in place.
Select a Safe Power Supply
■ Plug the machine into a 120 V AC outlet.
■ Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to which the machine is connected.
■ Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock.
■ The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on, affixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed
on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.
■ The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a loose connection and cause overheating, which
could result in a fire.
■ If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the power cord, it may damage the power cord or the
wires inside the machine may disconnect. This could result in a fire. Avoid the following situations:
• Connecting and disconnecting the power cord frequently.
• Tripping over the power cord.
• The power cord is bent near the connection part, and continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or the connection part.
• Applying excessive force on the power plug.
Installation Location and Handling
1-5
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe, and has a steady voltage.
Moving the Machine
■ If you intend to move the machine, even to a location on the same floor of your building, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer beforehand. Do not attempt to move the machine yourself.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Handling Precautions
■ Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine.
1-6
Installation Location and Handling
■ Some parts inside the machine are subject to high-voltages and temperatures. Take adequate precautions
when inspecting the inside of the machine. Do not carry out any inspections that are not described in the
manuals for this machine.
■ Be careful not to spill liquid or drop any foreign objects, such as paper clips or staples inside the machine.
If a foreign object comes into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it might cause a short circuit
and result in a fire or electrical shock.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ If there is smoke, or unusual noise, immediately turn the main power switch OFF, disconnect the power
cord from the power outlet, and then call your local authorized Canon dealer. Using the machine in this
state may cause a fire or electrical shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the power plug so that the
machine can be disconnected whenever necessary.
Installation Location and Handling
1-7
■ Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front covers while the machine is in operation. This may
result in paper jams.
■ Do not use flammable sprays, such as spray glue, near the machine. There is a danger of ignition.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
■ This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone may
vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone may be more noticeable during extended use or long production
runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated,
sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation.
■ For safety reasons, turn OFF the control panel power switch of the machine when it will not be used for
a long period of time, such as overnight. As an added safety measure, turn OFF the main power switch,
and disconnect the power cord when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, such as
during consecutive holidays.
OFF
■ Use a modular cable that is shorter than 9' 10" (3 meters).
■ Use a USB cable that is shorter than 9' 10" (3 meters).
■ Close the cover on the right side of the machine when using the machine. Continuing to use the machine
with the cover open may cause damage to the machine.
1-8
Installation Location and Handling
Backing Up/Exporting Data
Various data such as the received data, stored data, address book, and Settings/Registration settings are stored on the internal
hard disk of the machine.
A malfunction in the hard disk may cause these data to be lost. Please regularly back up/export your important data.
Please note that Canon will not be held responsible for any damages caused by the loss of data.
• By using the HDD Mirroring Kit, you can store the same data on two hard disks that are set to the machine and synchronize them. Even in this
case, we recommend that you regularly back up/export your important data, as it is possible that a malfunction in both hard disks may cause
the data to be lost.
• Also the passwords are backed up at the same time. However, some of the passwords may not be backed up, depending on the type of the
password.
■ Document data in the Advanced Box/Mail Box, forms for the Superimpose Image mode
For information on backing up this data, see e-Manual > Remote UI.
If the 2.5inch/250GB HDD is attached, you cannot back up the data of the Advanced Box from the Remote UI. We recommend that you access
the Advanced Box from your computer and back up the data. (See e-Manual > Security.)
■ Address book, device settings, Settings/Registration settings, favorite settings for Web Access, Printer
settings, paper information
For information on exporting each data, see e-Manual > Remote UI or Web Access.
■ Quick Menu information
For information on exporting the Quick Menu information, see e-Manual > Quick Menu.
■ User information of the Advanced Box
For information on exporting the user information of the Advanced Box, see e-Manual > Security.
■ Data relating to MEAP
• License files for MEAP applications
For information on backing up (downloading) license files, see e-Manual > MEAP.
• Data stored by MEAP applications
You may be able to back up data stored by MEAP applications, depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation
for each MEAP application.
• User authentication information registered for the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
For information on exporting user authentication information, see e-Manual > MEAP.
If your machine is not connected to a network, it is recommended that you print and store important information such as the Address Book.
(See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
Backing Up/Exporting Data
1-9
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
You can backup/export the following data:
Parts and Their Functions
This section provides you with the names and functions of all the parts on the outside and inside of the main unit, control panel,
and the touch panel display. An illustration of the machine with some optional products attached to it is also provided. For more
information on optional products, parts and their functions, see e-Manual > Optional Products.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
External View
The Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 and
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1 are attached.
1
2
11
10
9
3
8
7
6
1-10
Parts and Their Functions
5
4
13 12
Originals placed in the feeder are fed one sheet at a time to the platen glass
for scanning.
②Security Key (Optional)
For managing the use of the machine and preventing unauthorized copies.
(See “Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images,”
on p. xxi.)
③Main Power Switch
Press to the “I” side to turn the power ON. (See “Main Power and Control Panel
Power,” on p. 1-14.)
④Main Unit’s Right Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam inside the main unit. (See emanual > Problem Solving.)
⑤Multi-Purpose Tray
Use the multi-purpose tray to feed paper manually, and for loading
nonstandard paper stock, such as envelopes. (See e-manual> Basic
Operations.)
⑥Paper Drawer’s Right Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam in Paper Drawers 1 and 2.
⑦Paper Drawer 2
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
⑧Paper Drawer 1
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper (20 lb bond (80 g/m2)).
⑨Output Tray
Prints and copies are output to this tray.
⑩Output Paper Tray Guide
1
Tilt the output paper tray guide up to prevent output papers from falling
down.
⑪Control Panel
Includes the keys, touch panel display, and indicators required for operating
the machine. (See “Control Panel Parts and Functions,” on p. 1-13.)
⑫Test Button
Press this button to periodically test the circuit breaker. (See “Periodic
Inspection of the Breaker,” on p. xxxv.)
⑬Breaker
Detects excess current or leakage current. (See “Periodic Inspection of the
Breaker,” on p. xxxv.)
For more information on the optional products that can be attached to the machine, see e-Manual > Optional Products.
Parts and Their Functions
1-11
Before You Start Using This Machine
①Feeder (Optional)
Internal View
The Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 and Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1 are attached.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
6
1
2
5
4
3
①Platen Glass
Use the platen glass when scanning books, thick originals, thin originals,
transparencies, etc.
②Fixing Unit's Upper Cover
Open this cover to clear a paper jam in the fixing unit. (See e-manual >
Problem Solving.)
③Duplexing Unit
Pull out the duplexing unit to clear a paper jam. (See e-manual > Problem
Solving.)
1-12
Parts and Their Functions
④Waste Toner Container
Collects the waste toner.
⑤Toner replacement cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge.
⑥Toner Cartridge
When toner runs out, pull out the toner cartridge, and replace it with a new
one. Toner cartridges are sold separately (not standard equipment).(See emanual > Maintenance.)
Control Panel Parts and Functions
1
2
20
1
19
Before You Start Using This Machine
3
4
5
6
18
17
16
15
①Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power Supply)
Press to set or cancel the Sleep mode.
②USB Port
Use to connect memory media to the machine via USB.
③Settings/Registration key
Press to specify settings/registration.
④Counter Check key
Press to display the copy and print count totals on the touch panel display.
⑤Clear key
Press to clear entered values or characters.
⑥Stop key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan, copy, or fax (scanning only) job.
⑦Edit Pen
Use when operating the touch panel display, such as to enter characters. If
you lose the edit pen, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Do not use
an object with a sharp end on the control panel, such as a pencil or ballpoint
pen, in place of the edit pen.
⑧Start key
Press to start an operation.
⑨Main Power Indicator
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
⑩Error Indicator
Flashes or lights if there is an error in the machine. When the Error indicator
flashes, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display. When
the Error indicator maintains a steady red light, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
⑪Processing/Data Indicator
Flashes or blinks green when the machine is performing operations, and
maintains a steady green light when fax data is stored in memory.
⑫Reset key
Press to restore the standard settings of the machine.
⑬ID (Log In/Out) key
Press when setting or enabling Department ID Management.
⑭Numeric keys
Press to enter numerical values.
⑮Touch Panel Display
The settings screen for each function is shown on this display.
⑯Brightness Adjustment Dial
Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display.
⑰Volume Settings Key
Press to display the screen for adjusting settings such as the transmission
volume and fax sending/receiving alarm volume.
⑱Status Monitor/Cancel key
Press to check the status of jobs or to cancel print jobs. Also, press to check
status of the machine, such as checking the amount of paper remaining.
⑲Quick Menu key
Press to retrieve favorite functions stored in Quick Menu. Also, if you are using
authentication, Quick Menu set for each individual user can be displayed. (See
e-manual > Quick Menu.)
⑳Main Menu key
Press to return to the Main Menu screen such as when you want to switch
functions.
Parts and Their Functions
1-13
Main Power and Control Panel Power
The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control panel power switch, as well as a breaker
that detects excess current or leakage current.
How to Turn ON the Main Power
This section explains how to turn ON the main power.
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
If you want to turn OFF the main power and then back ON again, wait for at least 10 seconds after the main power indicator is turned OFF
before turning ON the main power.
1
Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the power outlet.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
2
If the Security Key is inserted into the machine, make sure that it is in the ON positions (turn it to the
right).
Security Key
When using the machine, insert the security
key into the key switch unit, and then turn it to the right.
3
Press the main power switch to the ON ("I" side) position.
The main power indicator on the control panel lights when the main power switch is turned ON.
When operating the main power switch, open the main power switch cover.
1-14
Main Power and Control Panel Power
If the main power indicator on the control panel does not light even though the main power switch is ON, be sure to check the breaker
to see if it is OFF. (See e-manual > Problem Solving.)
4
Various screens are displayed when system software is loading.
If you are using a login service, log in using the procedure for the login service you are using.
• You can select which functions to display on the screen when turning ON the main power, according to the Settings/Registration
settings. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
• If a Macintosh, which has been shut down, is connected to the machine via a USB cable, when you turn the machine ON, the Macintosh
may also turn ON. In this case, disconnect the Macintosh from the machine. (You may also be able to solve this problem by using a USB
hub between the machine and the Macintosh).
• If you are using Department ID Management with the Card Reader-C1, see e-Manual > Optional Products.
• If you are using Department ID Management, see e-Manual > Basic Operations.
• If you are using SSO-H, see e-Manual > Basic Operations.
Control Panel Power Switch
Press the control panel power switch to cancel the Sleep mode and resume normal machine operations.
The machine can receive and print documents from a personal computer when it is in the Sleep mode. I-fax and fax documents can also be
received while the machine is in the Sleep mode.
Main Power and Control Panel Power
1-15
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Shutting Down the Machine
This section explains how to turn OFF the main power. If there are any jobs currently being processed, or a MEAP application is
running when the Shutdown mode is activated, the machine asks you to confirm and cancel any existing jobs, and then access to
the hard disk is restricted. This procedure protects the hard disk from access errors the next time the machine is turned ON. When
the machine shuts down, it also performs an internal cooling down process, which enables the machine to be shut down safely.
1
Before You Start Using This Machine
1
Press the main power switch to the “ ” side.
When operating the main power switch, open the main power switch cover.
• Do not turn the main power OFF if the FAX Board is installed. Sending or receiving I-fax or fax documents cannot be done when the
main power is turned OFF.
• The machine may continue to operate during the shutdown process. Do not unplug the power cord until the main power indicator of
the machine is OFF.
• If the main power is turned OFF during scanning or printing, a paper jam may occur.
.
1-16
Main Power and Control Panel Power
Flow of Settings
2
$)"15&3
This section describes the main functions of the machine and the operations to be performed and settings specified after installing the machine.
What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Operations Required to Use the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Confirm the Following Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Logging In to the Machine as an Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Sending E-Mail/I-Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Sending Data to a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Using the Advanced Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Directly Sending Faxes from the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Remote Fax Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sending Faxes from a Computer via the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Printing from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Using the Machine as a Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Managing the Machine from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-1
What This Machine Can Do
All the elements you will ever need in a color digital multitasking machine.
Copy
Send
2
Mail Box
The imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030 incorporates a rich
array of input and output features that can greatly enhance your efficiency.
Equipped with features that meet the needs of document work in a digitized
office, the imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030 represents
the ultimate in color digital multitasking machines.
Flow of Settings
An asterisk (*) indicates functions which require optional equipment. For
information on the optional equipment required to use each function, and
the available combinations of optional equipment, see “Confirm the Following
Settings,” on p. 2-5.
Remote UI
Fax
Copying
See e-Manual > Copy
In addition to normal copying functions, convenient new functions, such as "Copy Sample"
which helps to avoid copy errors, "Booklet" for making copies into booklets, and "Different
Size Originals" for copying originals of different sizes together in one copy operation, are
provided to increase your productivity.
1
2
3
4
7
2
1
4
5
8
6
3
1
8
6
3
5
6
Booklet Mode
7
8
Storing Scanned Data/Printing Stored Data
See e-Manual > Scan and Store, Access Stored Files
The Scan and Store function enables you to save document data that has been scanned
from the scanner unit or created on a computer. The saved data can be printed at a
specified time, or merged with separately saved data or data created on a computer for
simultaneous processing.
Also, if you use the functions of the Advanced Box, you can set a file format (PDF, JPEG,
TIFF) to the scanned original, so that it can be accessed from your computer. The Advanced
Box can be opened to the public as an SMB server or WebDAV server. You can access the
Advanced Box from your computer and move files from your computer to the machine or
vice-versa.
Printing merged
documents
Scanning
various
originals
1
2-2
What This Machine Can Do
Sending
data from
computers
Sending Function
See e-Manual > Scan and Send
The Send function enables you to send scanned image or document data to file servers, or
send it by e-mail or I-fax. A variety of file formats are supported (PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and XPS),
which offer you greater flexibility in accommodating digital workplace environments.
Original
If the Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated, you can add Office Open XML
(pptx) to the list of supported file formats.
E-mail
File
I-Fax
Faxing*
Flow of Settings
2
See e-Manual > Using the Machine to Send/Receive a Fax
In addition to normal facsimile functions, the machine offers you Super G3 compatibility,
which enables you to transmit documents at high speeds, greatly reducing transmission
costs as compared to conventional facsimile machines. Scanned documents as well as
documents stored in the Mail Box/Memory RX Inbox, and computer data can be sent
by facsimile. You can also send documents to multiple addresses and forward received
facsimile to another destination.
Original
Fax
Also, by using the Remote Fax function, you can share the fax function on the same
network.
Printing
See e-Manual > Print
You can use this machine as a high-speed network printer. Various outputs are also possible
when printing, such as 2-sided printing and page alignment.
If the PS Printer Kit is activated, or if the ColorPASS, or the imagePASS is attached, you can
use this machine as the postscript printer with the Adobe PostScript3 software.
1
Sending data
from computers
Printing
What This Machine Can Do
2-3
Using the Remote User Interface
See e-Manual > Remote UI
You can control functions, such as confirming the status of the machine, job operations, and
printing instructions for saved scanned documents and data, all from your computer's Web
browser.
Web
Browser
Applying MEAP
2
See e-Manual > MEAP
Flow of Settings
The MEAP (Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform) incorporated in the machine
enables you to install applications to expand the functions of the machine.
Scanning Documents into Your Computer
The Network Scan function enables you to use the imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/
C5035/C5030 as a conventional scanner. You can scan a document using the machine, and
read the data in an application you are using on your computer. You can scan images of up
to 11"x17" in size at a resolution of 600x600 dpi.
See e-Manual > Scanner
Original
*The Network ScanGear software is supplied on the accompanying CD-ROM. For more
information on the Network Scan function, see e-Manual > Scanner.
Scanning
image data
Applying Utilities
You can specify various settings of the machine connected to a network when using utility
software. You can specify initial settings, confirm the status of the machine, and manage
documents.
2-4
What This Machine Can Do
Exporting data
to a computer
See e-Manual > Software
Operations Required to Use the Machine
This section describes the flow of operations and settings for the functions you will use.
Confirm the Following Settings
Some functions of the machine require optional equipment and operations/settings.
For more information on the optional equipment required to connect the machine to a network, see Chapter 4, "Before Connecting to a
Network."
Function
Copying
Scanning and Storing
Documents
Using the Stored
Documents
Scanning and Sending
Documents
Fax
Optional Equipment
Required
License
Registration
Operations Required
None
-
None
Mail Box
None
-
None
Advanced Box/
Network
None
-
See “Using the Advanced Box,” on
p. 2-9.
Memory Media
None
-
None*2
E-Mail/I-Fax
None
-
See “Sending E-Mail/I-Faxes,” on
p. 2-7.
Sending Documents
to File Servers
None
-
See “Sending Data to a File Server,”
on p. 2-8.
Sending Documents
from the Machine
FAX Board
Not required
See “Directly Sending Faxes from
the Machine,” on p. 2-9.
Receiving
Documents on the
Machine
FAX Board
Not required
None
Sending Documents
from a Computer via
the Machine
FAX Board
Not required
See “Sending Faxes from a
Computer via the Machine,” on p.
2-10.
Sending and
Receiving
Documents via the
Remote Fax Server
Remote Fax Kit
Required
See “Sending and Receiving Faxes
via the Remote Fax Server,” on p.
2-9.
Printing
None*1
-*1
See “Printing from a Computer,” on
p. 2-11.
Remote UI
None
-
See “Managing the Machine from a
Computer,” on p. 2-12.
MEAP
None
-
See “Managing the Machine from a
Computer,” on p. 2-12.
Scanning
None
-
See “Using the Machine as a
Scanner,” on p. 2-12.
*1 Optional equipment and/or license registration may be required, depending on the print function.
*2 The default setting for displaying memory media is 'Off'. To use the memory media, press [Display Settings] in Preferences (Settings/Registration) → press [Store Location Display Settings] →
[Memory Media] → [On].
Operations Required to Use the Machine
2
Flow of Settings
If you want to use functions that require license registration, see “Using System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License
Registration,” on p. 3-2. See the flowcharts in this section for functions that require operations or settings.
2-5
Logging In to the Machine as an Administrator
To specify the settings, you must log in to the machine as an administrator.
The operations available on the Settings/Registration screen vary between administrator and general user.
- For Administrator:
The Administrator can specify all of the system settings of the machine. As a default, system manager settings (System Manager ID/System
Password) are set on the machine. Thus, the Administrator must log in by entering the System Manager ID and the System Password on the
Settings/Registration screen. The default setting for both the System Manager ID and System Password is '7654321'. We recommend that you
change both the System Manager ID and System Password. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.) For information on the settings that can
only be set by the Administrator, see e-Manual > Security.
- For General Users:
Some operations on the Settings/Registration screen may be restricted. Operations that are restricted are grayed out and cannot be selected.
Flow of Settings
2
This section describes the procedures assuming that the machine is in default setting. If the Department ID Management or authentication for
SSO-H is set, enter the necessary items for each log in.
1
Press
(Settings/Registration).
2
Press [Log In].
2-6
Operations Required to Use the Machine
3
Enter the System Manager ID and System Password → press [OK].
Flow of Settings
2
When you are finished with the operation, press [Log Out] or
(Log In/Out) on the control panel to log out.
Sending E-Mail/I-Faxes
The following operations and settings are required to send e-mail/I-faxes with the machine.
For information on the system requirements for using this function, see “Using E-Mail/I-Fax,” on p. 4-5.
1
Connect the machine to the network.
See “Connecting to a Network,” on p. 5-3.
See “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9.
2
Set the machine to use the TCP/IP network.
See “TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 6-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.
3
Specify the e-mail/I-fax settings.
See “E-Mail/I-Fax Settings,” on p. 6-25.
Operations Required to Use the Machine
2-7
Sending Data to a File Server
The following operations and settings are required to send data to a file server with the machine.
• For information on the system requirements for using this function, see “Sending Data,” on p. 4-6.
• The file servers you can use depend on the network you are using. For information on the file servers you can use, refer to the following,
according to the network you are using.
- For a TCP/IP network: see “Setting Up a Computer as a File Server,” on p. 6-28.
- For an SMB/CIFS network: see “Setting Up a Computer as a File Server,” on p. 8-6.
2
Flow of Settings
1
Connect the machine to the network.
See “Connecting to a Network,” on p. 5-3.
See “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9.
2
Set the machine for the type of network you are using.
For a TCP/IP network
See “TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 6-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.
For an SMB/CIFS network
See “SMB/CIFS Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 8-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 8-3.
3
Set up the file server.
For an FTP server
See “FTP Server Settings,” on p. 6-29.
For a WebDAV server
See “WebDAV Server Settings,” on p. 6-36.
For a Windows shared folder/Samba shared folder
See “Setting Up a Computer as a File Server,” on p. 8-6.
2-8
Operations Required to Use the Machine
Using the Advanced Box
The following operations and settings are required to manage the Advanced Box users and open the Advanced Box to the public
by SMB or WebDAV.
1
Set the authentication management for the users that use the Advanced Box.
See “User Access Control for Advanced Box,” on p. 10-2.
2
Specify the settings required to open the Advanced Box to public.
Flow of Settings
2
See “Advanced Box Open to Public Settings,” on p. 10-6.
Directly Sending Faxes from the Machine
The following operations and settings are required to directly send faxes with the machine.
1
Specify the settings required for sending faxes.
See “Fax Settings,” on p. 11-2.
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Remote Fax Server
The following operations and settings are required to send and receive faxes from the machine via the remote fax server.
1
Specify the settings required for sending and receiving remote faxes.
“Remote Fax Settings,” on p. 11-9
Operations Required to Use the Machine
2-9
Sending Faxes from a Computer via the Machine
The following operations and settings are required to send faxes from a computer via the machine.
For information on the system requirements for using this function, see “Printing or Sending a Fax from a Computer,” on p. 4-2.
1
2
Connect the machine to a computer.
To connect via a network
Flow of Settings
See “Connecting to a Network,” on p. 5-3.
See “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9.
See “Communication Environment Setup,” on p. 5-11.
To connect via USB*
See “Connecting to a USB Interface,” on p. 5-5.
*In this case, proceed to step 3 after connecting the machine.
2
Set the machine for the type of network you are using.
For a TCP/IP network
See “TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 6-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.
For a NetWare network
See “NetWare Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 7-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 7-3.
For an SMB/CIFS network
See “SMB/CIFS Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 8-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 8-3.
For an AppleTalk network
See “AppleTalk Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 9-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 9-3.
3
Install the fax driver in the computer to use.
See Chapter 13, “Before Sending Faxes from Computers.”
4
Specify the settings required for sending faxes.
See “Fax Settings,” on p. 11-2.
2-10
Operations Required to Use the Machine
Printing from a Computer
The following operations and settings are required to print from a computer with the machine.
For information on the system requirements for using this function, see “Printing or Sending a Fax from a Computer,” on p. 4-2.
1
Connect the machine to a computer.
2
To connect via a network
Flow of Settings
See “Connecting to a Network,” on p. 5-3.
See “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9.
See “Communication Environment Setup,” on p. 5-11.
To connect via USB*
See “Connecting to a USB Interface,” on p. 5-5.
*In this case, proceed to step 3 after connecting the machine.
2
Set the machine for the type of network you are using.
For a TCP/IP network
See “TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 6-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.
For a NetWare network
See “NetWare Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 7-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 7-3.
For an SMB/CIFS network
See “SMB/CIFS Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 8-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 8-3.
For an AppleTalk network
See “AppleTalk Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 9-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 9-3.
3
Install the printer driver in the computer to use.
See Chapter 12, "Before Printing from Computers."
Operations Required to Use the Machine
2-11
Using the Machine as a Scanner
The following operations and settings are required to use the machine as a scanner.
1
Connect the machine to the network.
See “Connecting to a Network,” on p. 5-3.
See “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9.
2
Flow of Settings
2
Set the machine to use the TCP/IP network.
See “TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 6-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.
3
Install the software for specifying scanner settings (Network ScanGear) into the computer connected to the machine.
See Chapter 14, "Before Using the Remote Scan Function."
Managing the Machine from a Computer
The following operations and settings are required to manage the machine from a computer.
1
Connect the machine to the network.
See “Connecting to a Network,” on p. 5-3.
See “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9.
2
Set the machine to use the TCP/IP network.
See “TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures,” on p. 6-2.
See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.
3
Enable the machine to be managed from computers.
To enable the Remote UI
See “System Requirements for Using the Remote UI,” on p. 15-2.
See “Before You Start the Remote UI,” on p. 15-3.
To enable the MEAP management function (SMS)
See “System Requirements for Using SMS,” on p. 15-6.
See “Before Starting SMS (Preparations),” on p. 15-7.
2-12
Operations Required to Use the Machine
System Options/MEAP Applications That
Require License Registration
3
$)"15&3
This section describes how to specify the settings to use the system options and MEAP applications that require license registration on the
machine.
Using System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Using the System Options That Require License Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Obtaining the License Key/License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Registering the License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Installing the License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Obtaining the License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Installing the License File and Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Starting Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-1
Using System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License
Registration
You can enhance the functions of the machine by activating and installing various system options and MEAP applications.
■ System Options
For instructions on activating the system options, see “Using the System Options That Require License Registration,” on p. 3-3. The following are
the system options for this machine.
• PS Printer Kit
• PCL Printer Kit
• Direct Print Kit
• Barcode Printing Kit
• Remote Fax Kit
• Universal Send Advanced Feature Set
• Universal Send Security Feature Set
• Universal Send Digital User Signature Kit
• Encrypted Secure Print Software
• Secure Watermark
• Document Scan Lock Kit
• Data Erase Kit
• Web Access Software
• ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM KIT*
• Remote Operator's Software Kit
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
* ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM KIT is included with this machine.
■ MEAP Applications
For instructions on installing the MEAP applications, see “Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration,” on p. 3-7. Install from the
application file provided by the distributor of the application.
3-2
Using System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
Using the System Options That Require License Registration
This section describes the procedures for using the system options that require license registration.
Obtaining the License Key/License File
This section describes how to obtain the license key or the license file you need to activate the system option.
Make sure that the license access number certificate that is included with the package is available.
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
1
3
Check the management number you need to obtain the license key or the license file.
To obtain the license key or the license file, the following management number is required.
• License Access Number: Check the license access number certificate.
• Device Serial Number: Check and note the serial number which is displayed at the bottom left of the screen when you press [Counter
Check] on the machine.
2
3
Access http://www.canon.com/lms/license/.
Follow the instructions on the screen and obtain the license key/license file.
If the license key is obtained, see “Registering the License Key,” on p. 3-4.
If the license file is obtained, see “Installing the License File,” on p. 3-5.
Using the System Options That Require License Registration
3-3
Registering the License Key
This section describes how to register the license key from the touch panel display of the machine and activate the system
options.
System Manager Information (System Manager Department ID/System Manager PIN) is set by default in the machine. As a result, administrators
are required to enter a system manager department ID and system manager PIN in the Settings/Registration screen to log in. The default
settings for the system manager department ID and system manager PIN are both “7654321”. These should be changed to more suitable values.
For more information on the system manager department ID and PIN, see e-Manual > Security.
1
2
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Management Settings] → [License/Other] → [Register License].
Enter the license key using
-
(numeric keys) → press [Start].
The icons that are displayed are explained below:
Press to move the cursor.
[ ] [ ]:
[Backspace]: Press when you entered a wrong number. The number in front of the cursor is deleted and
you can reenter the correct number.
If the message <The value for the license key is not correct. Check the license key.> is displayed, press [OK] → enter the correct license key.
If the message <The feature required for installation is not present.> is displayed, you cannot register the license key. Press [OK] → cancel
the registration.
3
Press [OK].
The registered functions can be used only after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON).
(See “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p. 1-14.)
3-4
Using the System Options That Require License Registration
Installing the License File
This section describes how to install the license file from the Remote UI that is connected to the machine.
System Manager Information (System Manager Department ID/System Manager PIN) is set by default in the machine. As a result, administrators
are required to enter a system manager department ID and system manager PIN on the Log In screen of Remote UI to log in. The default
settings for the system manager department ID and system manager PIN are both “7654321”. These should be changed to more suitable values.
For more information on the system manager department ID and PIN, see e-Manual > Security.
From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [Management Settings] →
[License/Other] → [Register/Update Software].
3
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
1
The top page of [Register/Update Software] is displayed.
2
Click [Manual Installation].
Using the System Options That Require License Registration
3-5
3
Click [Browse] → select the license file to install → click [Next].
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
You do not have to use Application File Path.
4
3-6
Check the contents that will be installed on the confirmation screen → click [Install].
Using the System Options That Require License Registration
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
This section describes the procedures for using the MEAP applications that require license registration.
Obtaining the License File
If the license access number is printed on the package of the MEAP application you are using, you must obtain the license file.
1
Check the management number you need to obtain the license file.
To obtain the license file, the following management number is required.
• License Access Number: Check the license access number certificate.
• Device Serial Number: Check and note the serial number which is displayed at the bottom left of the screen when you press [Counter
Check] on the machine.
2
3
Access http://www.canon.com/lms/license/.
Follow the instructions on the screen and obtain the license file.
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
If the license access number is not printed on the package of the MEAP application you are using, the license file is issued by the distributor of
the MEAP application. For more information, see the manual for each MEAP application.
3-7
Installing the License File and Application File
You can install from the Remote UI screen or the SMS screen.
System Manager Information (System Manager Department ID/System Manager PIN) is set by default in the machine. As a result, administrators
are required to enter a system manager department ID and system manager PIN on the Log In screen of Remote UI to log in. The default
settings for the system manager department ID and system manager PIN are both "7654321". These should be changed to more suitable values.
For more information on the system manager department ID and PIN, see e-Manual > Security.
• For instructions on how to run the Remote UI and SMS, see Chapter 15, "Managing the Machine from a Computer."
• For more information on the Remote UI, see e-Manual > Remote UI.
• For more information on SMS, see e-Manual > MEAP.
• If you are updating an existing MEAP application to a newer version, stop the application before installing the new version. You cannot update
3
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
the application unless you stop it first. (See e-Manual > MEAP)
• The maximum number of applications that can be installed is 19.
• The maximum amount of hard disk space allocated to install MEAP applications is 1GB.
• You can confirm the hard drive space allocated to MEAP applications in [Hard Disk], under [Resource Information] displayed in the [MEAP
Application Management] page.
• There may be other system requirements for installation, depending on the applications. For instructions on settings, see the manual provided
with the application.
• If the machine enters the Shutdown mode while installing a MEAP application, an error message may be displayed on the [Install] page for
SMS, and the installation canceled. In this case, try installing the MEAP application again after the machine is restarted (the main power switch
is turned OFF, and then back ON again). For instructions on how to turn ON/OFF the machine, see “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p.
1-14.
Installing from Remote UI
1
From the top page of the Remote UI, click [Settings/Registration] → [Management Settings] →
[License/Others] → [Register/Update Software].
The top page of [Register/Update Software] is displayed.
3-8
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
2
3
Click [Manual Installation].
Select the application file and license file you want to install. Click [Next].
File extensions:
Application File:A file with the 'jar' extension.
License File: A file with the 'lic' extension.
• You cannot install license files only.
• When installing an application, make sure you specify the license file. You cannot install the application without specifying the license
file.
• To add a license file for an application that is already installed, see e-Manual > MEAP.
You can also specify the file path by entering it directly.
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3-9
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
4
Confirm the information displayed on the install confirmation page → click [Yes].
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
Depending on the application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Confirm the information displayed on the screen →
click [OK].
If you are installing a new application, the following information is displayed on the screen.
• Application Information
• License Information
The following information is displayed when you overwrite a MEAP application.
• Current Application Information
• Application Information after Overwrite
Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait.> is displayed again. After the installation, click [To Manual Installation] to
display the Manual Installation screen.
To use the installed application, you must start the application (See “Starting Applications,” on p. 3-13.)
3-10
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
Installing from SMS
1
From the top page of the SMS, click [Install MEAP Application].
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
The [Install MEAP Application/License] page is displayed.
2
Select the application file and license file you want to install. Click [Install].
File extensions:
Application File:A file with the 'jar' extension.
License File: A file with the 'lic' extension.
• You cannot install license files only.
• When installing an application, make sure you specify the license file. You cannot install the application without specifying the license
file.
• To add a license file for an application that is already installed, see e-Manual > MEAP.
You can also specify the file path by entering it directly.
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3-11
3
Confirm the information displayed on the install confirmation page → click [Yes].
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
Depending on the application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Confirm the information displayed on the screen →
click [OK].
If you are installing a new application, the following information is displayed on the screen.
• Application Information
• License Information
The following information is displayed when you overwrite a MEAP application.
• Current Application Information
• Application Information after Overwrite
Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait.> is displayed again. After installation is complete, the [MEAP Application
Management] page is displayed.
To use the installed application, you must start the application (See “Starting Applications,” on p. 3-13.)
3-12
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
Starting Applications
This section describes how to start the application that was installed from the SMS screen.
1
From the top page of the SMS, click [MEAP Application Management].
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
The details of each item are shown below.
Application Name:
Installed on:
Status:
License:
Resource Information:
Displays the name of the application.
Displays the date on which the application was installed.
Displays the status of the application.
Installed
Application has been installed, but not started. Or, the application has not been
restarted after stopping the application and then restarting the machine.
Started
Application is running.
Stopped
Application is stopped.
Stopping
Application is closing down.
Displays the license status of the application.
Installed
An effective license file has been installed.
Not Installed
License file is disabled.
Excess
Expiration date and the types of counters set for the installed license file, and any
counter value(s) exceeding the upper limit of the license file.
Invalid
Installed license file has exceeded its expiration date. Alternatively, current counter value
has exceeded the upper limit of the license file. (When a license file is set to many types
of counters, it will expire when any counter exceeds the upper limit.)
Displays the resources being used by the applications.
Hard Disk
Amount of hard disk space being used. Shown in kilobytes.
Memory
Amount of memory being used. Shown in kilobytes.
Threads
Number of threads.
Sockets
Number of sockets.
File Descriptor
Number of file descriptors.
Hard disk information is updated when an application is installed or uninstalled. All other items are updated when an application is
started or stopped.
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3-13
2
Select the application you want to start → click [Start].
System Options/MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
3
The application is started.
• You cannot start applications whose required license file has not been installed.
• When the resources required for memory, threads, sockets, or file descriptors has run out, the application will not start, even if you press
[Start].
3-14
Using MEAP Applications That Require License Registration
Before Connecting to a Network
4
$)"15&3
This section describes what you need to know before connecting the machine to a network, including the network environments with which the
machine is compatible, and how to check the network environment you are using.
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Printing or Sending a Fax from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Using E-Mail/I-Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Sending Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Checking Your Network Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Sample Windows Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Sample Macintosh Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sample UNIX Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Using a Network with Various Types of Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-1
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting
to a Network
This section describes the optional equipment and system environments required to connect the machine to a network.
For more information on the equipment needed, consult your local authorized Canon dealer.
By connecting the machine to the network, its settings and operations can be performed on computers using the Remote UI and other utilities,
without the need for any optional equipment. For more information on the Remote UI, see e-Manual > Remote UI. For more information on
utilities, see e-Manual > Software.
Optional Equipment Requirements
Before Connecting to a Network
4
Printing or Sending a Fax from a Computer
■ Printing
• If you want to use the UFR II printer driver
- Optional equipment is unnecessary
• If you want to use the PCL printer driver
- PCL Printer Kit
• If you want to use the PS printer driver (one of the following)
- PS Printer Kit
- imagePASS
- ColorPASS, for the imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051
• To print with Mac OS 9, you need to use a PS printer driver provided by Apple Inc. with the Mac OS, via an AppleTalk network.
• The PS printer driver can be used only in a Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later environment. Also, you cannot print documents via an AppleTalk network.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
4-2
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network
■ Sending a Fax (for a TCP/IP, SMB/CIFS, or NetWare network)
• Super G3 FAX Board
For details about FAX Boards, see e-Manual > Optional Products.
System Requirements
The following network and system environments are compatible when printing or sending a fax from a computer:
If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later.
■ With a TCP/IP Network:
• Compatible OS
4
Before Connecting to a Network
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
- Microsoft Windows XP Professional
- Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
- Solaris Version 1.1x (SunOS Version 4.1x) or later
- Solaris Version 2.5x (SunOS Version 5.5x) or later
- Mac OS X 10.3 or later
• Computers/memory
- Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly
If you are using Mac OS X, compatible operating systems differ depending on the type of printer driver. For details, see Chapter 12, "Before
Printing from Computers".
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network
4-3
■ With an SMB/CIFS Network:
• Compatible OS
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
- Microsoft Windows XP Professional
- Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
- Mac OS X 10.3 or later
• Compatible Protocol
- NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT)
• Computers/memory
- Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly
Before Connecting to a Network
4
When you are using Mac OS X 10.3 or later, you can only print via an SMB/CIFS network if you are using a PS printer driver provided by Apple
Inc. with the Mac OS.
■ With a NetWare Network:
• Compatible Servers
- Novell NetWare Version 3.2/4.1/4.11/4.2/5/5.1/6/6.5
• Compatible Clients
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
- Microsoft Windows XP Professional
- Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
• Computers/memory
- Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly
4-4
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network
■ With an AppleTalk Network:
• Compatible AppleTalk
- EtherTalk Phase 2
• See Chapter 12, "Before Printing from Computers," for compatible operating systems and computers.
The machine does not support Macintosh LocalTalk networks.
■ With a Server-Based Computing Environment:
• Compatible Windows Terminal Server (Services)
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008
• Compatible Software
- Citrix MetaFrame 1.8
- Citrix MetaFrame XP
Using E-Mail/I-Fax
Optional Equipment Requirements
Optional equipment is not required for using the e-mail/I-fax functions.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
System Requirements
The following system environments are confirmed for using the e-mail/I-fax functions:
• Compatible mail forwarding server software
- Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX)
- Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
(Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later)
- Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
• Compatible mail receiving server software
- Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX)
- Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
(Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later)
- Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network
4-5
Before Connecting to a Network
4
If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later.
• The machine sends e-mail or I-fax messages to mail servers using SMTP.
The machine can receive incoming messages from a mail server using the POP3 protocol or directly using the machine's own SMTP receiving
function.
If the latter method is used, it is not necessary for the mail server to support the POP3 protocol.
• The machine can receive I-fax images and error e-mail messages sent when errors occur during communication, but not any other type of
e-mail.
Sending Data
Optional Equipment Requirements
4
Before Connecting to a Network
Optional equipment is not required for sending data.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
System Requirements
The following network and system environments are compatible when sending data from the machine to a file server, depending
on the type of network used:
If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later.
■ With a TCP/IPv4 Network (Using FTP):
• Compatible servers
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and Internet Information Services (IIS) 5.0
- Microsoft Windows XP Professional and IIS 5.1
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and IIS 6.0
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008 and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise and IIS 7.0
- Solaris Version 2.6 or later
- Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later
- Mac OS X
• Compatible protocol
- TCP/IPv4
4-6
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network
■ With a TCP/IPv6 Network (Using FTP):
• Compatible servers
- Solaris Version 9 or later
- Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later
- Mac OS X 10.3 or later
• Compatible protocol
- TCP/IPv6
■ With a TCP/IPv4 Network (Using WebDAV):
• Compatible servers
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and IIS 5.0
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional and IIS 5.0
- Microsoft Windows XP Professional and IIS 5.1
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and IIS 6.0
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008 and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and Apache 2.0 for Win 32
- Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Apache 2.0 for Win 32
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and Apache 2.0 for Win 32
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008 and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise and Apache 2.0 or later
- Solaris Version 2.6 or later, and Apache 2.0 or later
- Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later, and Apache 2.0 or later
- Mac OS X
• Compatible protocol for the WebDAV server
- TCP/IPv4
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network
Before Connecting to a Network
4
4-7
■ With a TCP/IPv6 Network (Using WebDAV):
• Compatible servers
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and IIS 6.0
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008 and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise and IIS 7.0
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008 and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic and Apache 2.0 or later
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise and Apache 2.0 or later
- Solaris Version 9 or later, and Apache 2.0 or later
• Compatible protocol for the WebDAV server
- TCP/IPv6
Before Connecting to a Network
4
If you connect to the Internet via a proxy, the proxy server must support IPv6.
■ With an SMB/CIFS Network:
• Compatible servers
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
- Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
- Microsoft Windows XP Professional
- Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008
- Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
- Microsoft Windows Vista Business
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
- Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
- Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
• Compatible server software for sending data
- Samba 2.2.8a or later (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X)
• Compatible protocol
- NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT)
4-8
Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network
Checking Your Network Environment
Refer to the following examples to confirm the network environment that is connected to the machine, and then perform the
necessary operations for that environment.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
Sample Windows Network
In addition to IPv4 (Internet Protocol Version 4), the machine also supports IPv6 (Internet Protocol Version 6), and has a dual stack
configuration that enables it to communicate with both IPv4 networks and IPv6 networks. You can select whether to use the
functions of IPv4 or IPv6. You can also enable the functions of both IPv4 and IPv6. The IPv4 network and IPv6 network used by the
machine supports IPSec (Security Architecture for Internet Protocol). (See e-Manual > Network.) For information on the optional
products required to use the IPSec function, see e-Manual > Optional Products.
To use the e-mail/I-fax function, the TCP/IP protocol is required.
After configuring the settings in accordance with Chapter 5, "Settings Common to the Network Protocols," see the following,
depending on the protocol:
• Chapter 6, "Using a TCP/IP Network"
• Chapter 8, "Using an SMB/CIFS Network"
• The machine does not support NetBEUI.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
Checking Your Network Environment
4-9
4
Before Connecting to a Network
In a Windows network environment, the TCP/IP or NetBIOS (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) protocol can be used. Multiple protocols can be
used at the same time.
Sample Macintosh Network
In Mac OS 8/9, the AppleTalk (EtherTalk) protocol is used. In Mac OS X, either the AppleTalk (EtherTalk), TCP/IP, or NetBIOS (NetBIOS
over TCP/IP) protocol can be used.
To use the e-mail/I-fax function or to send data, the TCP/IP protocol is required.
After configuring the settings in accordance with Chapter 5, "Settings Common to the Network Protocols," see the following,
depending on the protocol:
• Chapter 9, "Using an AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)"
• Chapter 6, "Using a TCP/IP Network"
• Chapter 8, "Using an SMB/CIFS Network"
The protocol you can use differs depending on the version of Mac OS or type of printer driver. For details, see Chapter 12, "Before Printing from
Computers".
Before Connecting to a Network
4
Sample UNIX Network
With UNIX computers, the TCP/IP protocol is used.
After configuring the settings in accordance with Chapter 4, "Settings Common to the Network Protocols," see the following:
• Chapter 6, "Using a TCP/IP Network"
4-10
Checking Your Network Environment
Using a Network with Various Types of Computers
If there are various types of computers on the network, the network operations you are required to perform depend on the type
of computers being used.
For example, if you are using Windows XP and Macintosh computers, you will need to specify the settings described in both
"Sample Windows Network" and "Sample Macintosh Network".
To use the e-mail/I-fax function, the TCP/IP protocol is required.
To use the data sending function, either the TCP/IP or NetBIOS protocol is required.
After configuring the settings in accordance with Chapter 5, "Settings Common to the Network Protocols," see the following,
depending on the protocol:
• Chapter 6, "Using a TCP/IP Network"
• Chapter 8, "Using an SMB/CIFS Network"
• Chapter 9, "Using an AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)"
Before Connecting to a Network
4
Checking Your Network Environment
4-11
Before Connecting to a Network
4
4-12
Checking Your Network Environment
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
$)"15&3
This chapter describes setting items common to the network protocols, which are required for using the machine in a network environment.
Before specifying the settings of the desired protocol (Chapters 6 to 9), be sure to set the items explained in this chapter.
Network Environment Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Connecting to a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Connecting to a USB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Touch Panel Display Transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Communication Environment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-1
Network Environment Setup Procedures
Before using the machine in a network environment, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures.
1
Network Cable Connection (See “Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network,” on p. 5-3.)
Connect the machine to the network using the network cables.
2
Interface Settings (See “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9.)
Specify the interface settings for communication between the machine and computers on your network. To specify the settings, use:
• The machine's control panel
• The Remote UI (via a web browser)
3
5
Communication Environment Setup (See “Communication Environment Setup,” on p. 5-11.)
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
Set up the environment for communication between the machine and computers on your network.
4
IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings (see e-Manual > Network.)
Specify the settings of IEEE802.1X authentication.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
5-2
Network Environment Setup Procedures
Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network
The machine can be connected to a computer or network with a USB cable or 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet cable.
• External USB devices (e.g., memory, keyboard, mouse, etc.) are not supported.
• A USB cable or network cable are not included in this package. Please obtain a suitable cable for your computer or network.
Connecting to a Network
The machine supports TCP/IP, AppleTalk, and NetWare, which enables it to be used by Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, and Linux
computers. It also has a 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T connector that can be used on most LANs.
When using 10Base-T/100Base-TX, connect the machine's RJ-45 connector to a hub port using a Category 5 twisted pair LAN
cable. When using 1000Base-T, it is recommended you use an Enchanced Category 5 twisted pair LAN cable.
Computer with
100Base-TX/1000Base-T
Connector
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
Computer with
10Base-T Connector
Ethernet Cable
Hub
Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network
5-3
When connecting the interface cable or network cable, be sure to observe the following precautions to avoid electrical shock.
- Turn OFF the machine's main power switch before disconnecting the power cord from the power outlet. (See Chapter 1, "Before
You Start Using This Machine." )
- Turn OFF the computer and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
• You cannot use the machine as a repeater, bridge, or gateway.
• If two or more machines are on an AppleTalk network, they should be switched 'ON' 10 seconds or more apart.
• The machine can automatically detect the type of Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, or 1000Base-T).
• If you are using a mixed 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T environment, devices on the network (hubs, routers, etc.) must support the mixed
environment. For more information, consult your local authorized Canon dealer.
• After connecting the network cable, perform the following operations. (For more information, see the relevant descriptions.)
-
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
Set the date and time, and System Manager settings. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration and Security.)
Set the network settings.
Install a driver if necessary. (See Chapter 12, "Before Printing from Computers," or Chapter 13, "Before Sending Faxes from Computers.")
Install a utility if necessary. (See the manuals provided with the utility.)
5-4
Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network
Connecting to a USB Interface
You can connect the machine to a computer with a USB port via a USB cable. The machine is USB 2.0 Hi-Speed compatible. The
drivers, and utility that matches the operating system on your computer will be installed. For more information on installing the
driver through a USB connection, see Chapter 12, "Before Printing from Computers," or Chapter 13, "Before Sending Faxes from
Computers." For information on installing a utility, see the manuals provided with the utility.
Driver Software
USB Connector
USB Cable
USB Port
If you connect or disconnect the USB cable while the machine's main power switch is ON, do not touch the metal parts around the
connector, as this may result in electrical shock.
• Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable in the following situations, as it may cause your computer or the machine to operate poorly:
- When installing the driver
- When the computer is booting up
- When printing
• If you disconnect the USB cable with the computer or machine's main power switch ON, always wait at least five seconds before reconnecting
the cable. Immediately reconnecting the cable may cause your computer or machine to operate poorly.
• When the machine is connected to a computer via the USB cable, you will not be able to use some of the utilities.
• If you connect the machine to a computer via a USB cable, confirm that [Use USB Device] (in the USB Settings screen) is set to 'On'. (See eManual > Security.)
Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network
5-5
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
• If you connect the machine to a Macintosh via a USB cable, the Macintosh, if shut down, may start up when the machine starts up or returns
from the Sleep mode. If this happens, disconnect the USB cable (the use of a USB hub between the machine and the Macintosh may solve this
problem).
• If the machine is connected to a computer with a USB cable, you can print a document from your computer using the printer driver, or send a
fax from your computer using the fax driver.
• You cannot specify a computer connected to the machine through a USB connection as a destination for Send jobs or forwarded jobs. Also,
with that computer, you cannot use the Remote UI and the Network Scan function.
• The appropriate USB interface differs depending on the operating system of the connected computer as follows. For more information, consult
your local authorized Canon dealer.
- Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB 1.1 equivalent)
- Mac OS 8/9/X (10.3.2 or earlier): USB Full-Speed (USB 1.1 equivalent)
- Mac OS X (10.3.3 or later): USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB 1.1 equivalent)
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
5-6
Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network
Touch Panel Display Transition
The following is a flow diagram of the touch panel display used in this manual.
Specify the network settings from the Settings/Registration screen displayed by pressing
(Settings/Registration).
To move up one level, press [Up].
See this diagram to specify the various network settings, in accordance with the procedures in Chapters 6 to 9.
Settings/Registration screen
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
Preferences screen
Network screen
TCP/IP Settings screen
Touch Panel Display Transition
5-7
Settings specified from the control panel become effective after the machine is restarted, after the procedure. Turn OFF the machine, wait at
least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON. (See Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This Machine." )
• System Manager Information (System Manager Department ID/System Manager PIN) is set by default in the machine. As a result, administrators
are required to enter a system manager department ID and system manager PIN in the Settings/Registration screen to log in. The default
settings for the system manager department ID and system manager PIN are both "7654321". These should be changed to more suitable values.
For more information on the system manager department ID and PIN, see e-Manual > Security.
• For instructions on how to turn ON/OFF the machine, See Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This Machine."
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
5-8
Touch Panel Display Transition
Interface Settings
This section describes how to specify the interface settings from the control panel. If you are configuring the settings for the first
time, use the control panel of the machine.
After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see
e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
1
On the Network screen, press [Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes] → specify the following.
[On]: If errors related to network connections occur, an error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine. If you want to
use the machine in a network environment, select [On].
[Off ]: Messages related to network connections are no longer displayed. If you want to use the machine without connecting to a network,
select [Off ].
Even if you switch the [Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes] setting from 'On' to 'Off', if the network connections are correctly set
they will not be disconnected. The settings in the Network screen will not be changed.
Interface Settings
5-9
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
2
On the Network screen, press [Ethernet Driver Settings] → specify the following.
● If you want the machine to automatically determine the communication mode and Ethernet type:
5
☐ <Auto Detect>: [On]
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
If you reconnect the network cable (for example, reconnect the cable to a different Ethernet hub) with the machine's main power
switch ON, the Auto Detect function will not work even if you set <Auto Detect> to [On]. Turn OFF the machine, wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn it ON. (Connect the cable with the machine's main power switch OFF.)
• The machine automatically determines the Ethernet type. Press [On] unless you want to specify a particular Ethernet setting.
• If you set <Auto Detect> to 'On', the machine will not enter a complete Sleep mode.
● If you want to manually set the communication mode and Ethernet type for specifying a particular Ethernet
type setting:
☐ <Auto Detect>: [Off ].
Select the appropriate items for <Communication Mode> and <Ethernet Type>, according to the network environment you are using.
• To connect with 1000Base-T, select [Full Duplex] for <Communication Mode>.
• If you select [10 Base-T] or [100 Base-TX] for <Ethernet Type>, the machine will not enter a complete Sleep mode.
5-10
Interface Settings
Communication Environment Setup
This section describes how to set up the environment for communication between the machine and computers on your network.
If you are configuring the settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.
After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see
e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
[SNMP Settings] does not support AppleTalk networks.
On the Network screen, press [SNMP Settings] → specify the settings for SNMP v. 1.
[On] for <Use SNMP v. 1>: Follow the procedure below to specify the MIB access permissions and community names.
5
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
1
Communication Environment Setup
5-11
• The machine supports the SNMP v. 1 and SNMP v. 3 management functions. You can use them simultaneously. The [Read Only]/[Read/
Write] functions of SNMP v. 1 and the security functions of SNMP v. 3, such as an encrypted communication path, enable you to manage
devices more securely.
The available combinations of SNMP v. 1 and SNMP v. 3 functions you can use are shown below:
SNMP v. 1
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
SNMP v. 3
Description
Use SNMP v. 1
MIB Access
Permission
Use SNMP v. 3
On
Read/Write
On/Off
You can set or browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP
v. 1 to obtain information.
As the write access with SNMP v. 1 is enabled, the security functions of SNMP
v. 3 are not available, regardless of the settings for <Use SNMP v. 3>.
On
Read Only
On
You can only browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP
v. 1 to obtain information.
Only users who have been assigned access rights can set each item of the
machine with a utility that uses SNMP v. 3.
On
Read Only
Off
You can only browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP
v. 1 to obtain information.
Off
-
On
Only users who have been assigned access rights can set or browse each
item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP v. 3.
Off
-
Off
You cannot set or browse each item of the machine with a utility.
• If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, press [On] for both <Use SNMP v. 1> and [Dedicated Port Settings].
• You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict IP addresses, it is not possible to
set or browse detailed information concerning the machine on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed to send or
receive data, even if <Use SNMP v. 1>, <Use SNMP v. 3>, and [Dedicated Port Settings] are set to 'On'. For details, see “TCP/IPv4 Settings,”
on p. 6-3 or see “TCP/IPv6 Settings,” on p. 6-9.
5-12
Communication Environment Setup
● If you want to specify a Community Name 1
☐ Press [Set Community Name 1] → [On] → specify the settings for <MIB Access Permission> and the community name in
[Community Name].
You can also change the community name in [Community Name] to a name other than 'public'.
● If you want to specify a Community Name 2
5
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
☐ Press [Set Community Name 2 ] → [On] → specify the settings for <MIB Access Permission> and the community name in
[Community Name].
You can also change the community name in [Community Name] to a name other than 'public2'.
2
Specify the settings for SNMP v. 3.
[On] for <Use SNMP v. 3>: Specify the user and context according to the following procedures.
Communication Environment Setup
5-13
An SNMP v. 3 user with the following settings is registered by default. Delete or change these settings as necessary.
- User: initial
- MIB Access Permission: Read/Write
- Security Settings: Auth. Yes/Encry. Yes
- Authent. Algorithm: MD5
- Authent. Password: initial
- Encryption Password: initial
● If you want to add an SNMP v. 3 user:
☐ Press [User Settings] → [Register] → specify the user name, MIB permissions, and security settings.
If you select [Auth. Yes/Encry. Yes] from the Security Settings drop-down list, select the authentication algorithm → enter the
passwords for authentication and encryption. If you select [Auth. Yes/Encry. No] from the Security Settings drop-down list, select the
authentication algorithm → enter the password for authentication.
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
● If you want to confirm or change the SNMP v. 3 user settings:
☐ Press [User Settings] to select the user whose settings you want to confirm or change → press [Details/Edit].
Confirm the displayed information → change the settings if necessary.
● If you want to delete an SNMP v. 3 user:
☐ Press [User Settings] to select the user whose settings you want to delete → press [Delete].
● If you want to change the status of an SNMP v. 3 user:
☐ Press [User Settings] → select the user whose status you want to change → press [User On/Off ].
5-14
Communication Environment Setup
● If you want to edit the context:
☐ Press [Context Settings] → edit the context.
If you want to add a context, press [Register] to add a new context. If you want to change a context, select the context you want to
change → press [Edit] to change the context. If you want to delete a context, select the context you want to delete → press [Delete].
3
Set monitoring for the printer management information.
[On] for <Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host>: If you are using Windows Vista and set [Standard TCP/IP port] for the printer driver port, the
SNMP port monitoring function will be enabled automatically to obtain printer management information such as information on print
applications and printer ports.
Communication Environment Setup
5-15
5
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
A context named 'NULL' is registered by default. The 'NULL' context cannot be deleted, and is not displayed on the Context Settings
screen.
4
On the Network screen, press [Dedicated Port Settings] → specify the following.
5
• If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, press [On] for both <Use SNMP v. 1> and [Dedicated Port Settings].
• If you want to use the machine as a remote fax server machine, set [Dedicated Port Settings] to 'On'. For details on the remote fax
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
[On]: You can set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility (UFR II/PCL/PS printer drivers, etc.).
• You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict IP addresses, it is not possible to
settings, see “Remote Fax Settings,” on p. 11-9.
set or browse detailed information concerning the machine on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed to send or
receive data, even if <Use SNMP v. 1>, <Use SNMP v. 3>, and [Dedicated Port Settings] are set to 'On'. For details, see “TCP/IPv4 Settings,”
on p. 6-3 or see “TCP/IPv6 Settings,” on p. 6-9.
5
On the Network screen, press [Use Spool Function] → specify the following.
[On]: You can spool print jobs transmitted to this machine on the machine's hard disk.
5-16
Communication Environment Setup
If the PS Printer Kit is activated, take note of the following:
- If you print a file in PDF, XPS, or PS format by specifying its URL on the Remote UI, the print job will always be spooled, regardless of
the settings made under this option.
When you spool a print job on the machine's hard disk, the time required to release a computer outputting a print job is shortened.
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
Communication Environment Setup
5-17
Settings Common to the Network Protocols
5
5-18
Communication Environment Setup
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
$)"15&3
This chapter describes the settings and procedures necessary to connect and use the machine with a TCP/IP network.
TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
TCP/IPv4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
TCP/IPv6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Startup Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
FTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
WebDAV Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-1
TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures
To use a TCP/IP network, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.
1
Protocol Settings (See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.)
Specify the protocol settings. To specify the settings, use:
• The machine's control panel
• The Remote UI (via a web browser)
• Canon utilities
2
Computer Settings for Printing/Sending a Fax (See e-Manual > Network.)
Specify the settings for each computer you use for printing or sending a fax. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see
“Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network,” on p. 4-2.)
3
6
Computer Settings for a File Server (See “Setting Up a Computer as a File Server,” on p. 6-28.)
Using a TCP/IP Network
Specify the settings of the computer receiving data sent from the machine.
• It is recommended that steps 1 and 3 above be performed by the network administrator.
• The machine or printing equipment does not come with printer driver software that can be used on a UNIX platform. (Use LPD to set up a
printer in UNIX.)
• As the fax option does not come with fax driver software for the UNIX platform, it is not possible to send a fax from a UNIX platform.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• A pre-determined port must be opened in order to initiate network communication using TCP/IP. The required port can be opened by selecting
[On] for all of the [Network] settings in the machine. It is recommended that any unused functions be set to [Off]. When a port is opened, it is
possible for a third person to gain unauthorized access.
6-2
TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures
Protocol Settings
This section describes how to specify the protocol settings for the machine using the control panel. If you are configuring the
settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.
After configuring the settings, you can change the content by using software other than the control panel of the machine. For
details, see e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
• When using functions to access external servers on the internet, you may not be able to access them due to the settings of firewalls, etc. In this
case, consult your network administrator.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
TCP/IPv4 Settings
If you want to use IPv6 communications at the same time, follow the procedure in "TCP/IPv6 Settings," to specify the required
settings, and the procedure in "Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings," on p. 6-24 to confirm the settings.
1
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPv4 Settings] → [Use IPv4].
Protocol Settings
6-3
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
This section describes the procedure for setting TCP/IPv4 using the control panel. After specifying the settings for TCP/IPv4, follow
the procedure in “Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6,” on p. 6-15 to specify the required settings, and the procedure
in "Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings," on p. 6-23 to check whether the network settings are correct. If the settings for TCP/IPv6 are
already specified and you have finished specifying the settings common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6, only check the network
settings after completing this procedure.
2
In <Use IPv4>, specify the following.
[On] for <Use IPv4>: IPv4 networks can be used.
[Off ] for <Use IPv4>: IPv4 networks cannot be used, regardless of the settings specified for IPv4 on the Settings/Registration screen. The
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) table is also disabled.
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
If you set <Use IPv4> to 'Off', you cannot use an SMB/CIFS network.
3
On the TCP/IPv4 Settings screen, press [IP Address Settings] → specify the following.
● Using a fixed IP address:
☐ [DHCP], [RARP], and [BOOTP]: [Off ]
Enter the appropriate values in [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Gateway Address].
It takes about two minutes to check whether the DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP settings can be used. If you do not plan to use one of these
settings, it is recommended that you turn them off.
● Obtaining automatically an IP address:
☐ [DHCP], [RARP], or [BOOTP]: [On]
If this information cannot be obtained via DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP after you restart the machine, enter the IP address, subnet mask, and
gateway address to use the settings entered in this step.
6-4
Protocol Settings
• If the machine is restarted after DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP settings are specified, the TCP/IP Settings screen displays the IP address setting
values obtained from the DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP server. (If the IP address, host name, and domain name have been previously set, these
will be overwritten by the setting values obtained from DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.)
• If you use DHCP without the DNS dynamic update function, it is recommended that an identical IP address be assigned to the machine
at all times. (If the IP address is not identical, the host name for the machine will not correspond to the IP address.)
4
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [DNS Settings] → [DNS Server Address Settings].
6
5
Using a TCP/IP Network
In <IPv4>, specify the following.
If you want to use dynamic DNS updating, enter the IPv4 address of the DNS server in [Primary DNS Server].
If you do not want to set up a secondary DNS server, enter <0.0.0.0>.
If you set [BOOTP] or [DHCP] to 'On' in step 3, the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
Protocol Settings
6-5
6
On the DNS Settings screen, press [DNS Host/Domain Name Settings] → in <IPv4>, specify the
following.
Enter the name of the machine as [Host Name], and the network domain name of the machine as [Domain Name].
If you want to use dynamic DNS updating, it is necessary to set a host name and domain name.
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
If you set [BOOTP] or [DHCP] to 'On' in step 3, the host name and domain name you set manually will be overwritten.
7
On the DNS Settings screen, press [DNS Dynamic Update Settings] → in <IPv4>, specify the
following.
[On] for <DNS Dynamic Update>: If your environment includes a dynamic DNS server, you can automatically register the IPv4 address, host
name, and domain name set for the machine in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
6-6
Protocol Settings
• If you have a DHCP server running Windows 2000 Server that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record,
configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
- In the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select
[Automatically update DHCP client information in DNS] → [Update DNS only if DHCP client requests].
• If you have a DHCP server running Windows 2003 Server that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record,
configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
- In the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Enable DNS
dynamic updates according to the settings below] → [Dynamically update DNS A and PTR (Pointer Record) records only if requested by
the DHCP clients].
- In the Active Directory environment, right-click the icon of the DHCP server you are using → select [Properties]. In the [Advanced]
sheet of the displayed dialog box, click [Credentials]. In the [DNS dynamic update credentials] dialog box, enter the user name,
domain, and password for the Active Directory.
8
On the Network screen, press [Firewall Settings] → [IPv4 Address Filter] → specify the following.
By specifying the settings described below, you can filter received packets and transmitted packets using IPv4 addresses and improve
security when sending and receiving data between your computer and the machine. The possibility of a third person gaining
unauthorized access can be reduced by configuring the settings for [IPv4 Address Filter] in accordance with the environment you are
using.
If you want to enable data transmission/reception only with a computer having a specified IPv4 address, set the default policy for the
transmission or reception filter so as to deny transmission/reception, and enter the IPv4 address to be allowed. Data transmission/
reception will be enabled only between the computer having the specified IPv4 address and the machine. The Remote UI can be
used, and information regarding the machine can be displayed and set using a utility only on the computer whose IPv4 address has
been specified.
● If you want to deny transmission/reception of data with the computer having the specified IPv4 address:
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to 'On'.
☐ Set <Default Policy> to [Allow].
☐ Press [Register] → set the IPv4 address or range of addresses for which data transmission/reception is to be denied, or specify the
prefix and prefix length of the IPv4 address(es).
Protocol Settings
6-7
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
If you want to deny data transmission/reception between a computer with a specified IPv4 address and the machine, set the default
policy for the transmission or reception filter so as to allow transmission/reception, and enter the IPv4 address to be denied. Data
transmission/reception between the computer having the specified IPv4 address and the machine will be disabled. Also, the Remote
UI cannot be used, and information regarding the machine cannot be displayed or set using a utility on the computer whose IPv4
address has been specified.
If data transmission/reception is attempted between the device having the IPv4 address specified in this procedure and the machine, a
block log will be generated. To display the block log, see e-Manual > Network.
● If you want to allow transmission/reception of data only with the computer having the specified IPv4 address:
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to 'On'.
☐ Set <Default Policy> to [Reject].
☐ Press [Register] → set the IPv4 address or range of addresses for which data transmission/reception is to be allowed, or specify the
prefix and prefix length of the IPv4 address(es).
● If you do not want to restrict data transmission/reception:
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to 'Off'.
• You can register up to 16 IPv4 addresses, IPv4 address ranges, or IPv4 address prefixes.
• The value of [First Address] should be less than or equal to that of [Last Address].
• If the usage of a protocol or print application is not permitted on your device, it cannot be used even after settings in [Firewall Settings]
have been changed; on your device, configure the settings to permit the protocol or print application.
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
• If you enter '255' in [Prefix Length], no IPv4 addresses will be set.
• If you enter '0' in [Prefix Length], all IPv4 addresses will be set.
• If you enter '32' in [Prefix Length], the IPv4 address for the machine will be set.
6-8
Protocol Settings
TCP/IPv6 Settings
This section describes the procedure for setting TCP/IPv6 using the control panel. After specifying the settings for TCP/IPv6, follow
the procedure in “Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6,” on p. 6-15 to specify the required settings, and the procedure
in “Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings,” on p. 6-24 to check whether the network settings are correct. If the settings for TCP/IPv4 are
already specified and you have finished specifying the settings common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6, only check the network
settings after completing this procedure. If you want to use IPv4 communications at the same time, follow the procedure in “TCP/
IPv4 Settings,” on p. 6-3 to specify the required settings, and the procedure in “Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings,” on p. 6-23 to check
the settings.
The machine can use up to seven of the following IPv6 addresses. With IPv6 communication, multiple IPv6 addresses can be used
at the same time.
If the IPv6 address assigned to the machine is the same as another node, you may not be able to perform IPv6 communication, even though an
IPv6 address is displayed on the screen.
■ Link local address (1)
■ Manual address (0 or 1)
A fixed address that is set from the control panel.
■ Stateless address (0 to 4)
A stateless address is automatically set using the machine's MAC address and the prefix (information indicating the network belonged to)
included in the RA (Router Advertisement) notified by the router when the machine is started.
■ Stateful address (0 or 1)
A stateful address can be obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
1
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPv6 Settings] → [Use IPv6].
Protocol Settings
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
An address that is only valid within the same link. A link local address is automatically set using a specific prefix (fe80::) and an interface
identifier generated from the MAC address of the machine. When the machine is using the functions of IPv6, one link local address is always
registered.
6-9
2
In [Use IPv6], specify the following.
[On] for <Use IPv6>: You can use an IPv6 network. A link local address is automatically set.
3
On the IPv6 Settings screen, press [Stateless Address Settings] → specify the following.
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
[On] for <Use Stateless Address>: A stateless address is automatically set when the machine is started.
The stateless address is discarded when the machine is restarted (with the machine's main power switch ON).
4
On the IPv6 Settings screen, press [Manual Address Settings] → specify the following.
[On] for <Use Manual Address>: You can set the IPv6 address manually.
Enter the IPv6 address value in [Manual Address] and the IPv6 address prefix length in [Prefix Length].
Enter the default router address value in [Default Router Addr.]. If you do not want to specify the default router address, leave [Default
Router Addr.] blank.
6-10
Protocol Settings
• You cannot use a manual address if you leave [Manual Address] blank. You also cannot set any of the following types of address for
5
[Manual Address]:
- Multicast address
- Address composed entirely of zeros
- IPv4 compatible address (an IPv6 address with the top 96 bits set to '0' and an IPv4 address in the lower 32 bits)
- IPv4 mapped address (an IPv6 address with the top 96 bits set to '0:0:0:0:0:ffff:' and an IPv4 address in the lower 32 bits)
• You cannot enter a multicast address or an address composed entirely of zeros in [Default Router Addr.].
On the IPv6 Settings screen, press [Use DHCPv6] → specify the following.
[On] for <Use DHCPv6>: You can use DHCPv6 to obtain a stateful address from a DHCP server.
6
On the Network screen, press [Firewall Settings] → [IPv6 Address Filter] → specify the following.
By specifying the settings described below, you can filter received packets and transmitted packets using IPv6 addresses and improve
security when sending and receiving data between your computer and the machine. The possibility of a third person gaining
unauthorized access can be reduced by configuring the settings for [IPv6 Address Filter] in accordance with the environment you are
using.
If you want to deny data transmission/reception between a computer with a specified IPv6 address and the machine, set the default
policy for the transmission or reception filter so as to allow transmission/reception, and enter the IPv6 address to be denied. Data
transmission/reception between the computer having the specified IPv6 address and the machine will be disabled. Also, the Remote
UI cannot be used, and information regarding the machine cannot be displayed or set using a utility on the computer whose IPv6
address has been specified.
If you want to enable data transmission/reception only with a computer having a specified IPv6 address, set the default policy for the
transmission or reception filter so as to deny transmission/reception, and enter the IPv6 address to be allowed. Data transmission/
reception will be enabled only between the computer having the specified IPv6 address and the machine. The Remote UI can be
used, and information regarding the machine can be displayed and set using a utility only on the computer whose IPv6 address has
been specified.
● If you want to deny transmission/reception of data with the computer having the specified IPv6 address:
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to 'On'.
☐ Set <Default Policy> to [Allow].
Protocol Settings
6-11
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
☐ Press [Register] → set the IPv6 address or range of addresses for which data transmission/reception is to be denied, or specify the
prefix and prefix length of the IPv6 address(es).
If data transmission/reception is attempted between the device having the IPv6 address specified in this procedure and the machine, a
block log will be generated. To display the block log, see e-Manual > Network.
6
● If you want to allow transmission/reception of data only with the computer having the specified IPv6 address:
Using a TCP/IP Network
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to 'On'.
☐ Set <Default Policy> to [Reject].
☐ Press [Register] → set the IPv6 address or range of addresses for which data transmission/reception is to be allowed, or specify the
prefix and prefix length of the IPv6 address(es).
● If you do not want to restrict data transmission/reception:
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to 'Off'.
• You can register up to 16 IPv6 addresses, IPv6 address ranges, or IPv6 address prefixes.
• You cannot specify a multicast address for an IPv6 address.
• The value of [First Address] should be less than or equal to that of [Last Address].
• If the usage of a protocol or print application is not permitted on your device, it cannot be used even after settings in [Firewall Settings]
have been changed; on your device, configure the settings to permit the protocol or print application.
7
• If you enter '255' in [Prefix Length], no IPv6 addresses will be set.
• If you enter '0' in [Prefix Length], all IPv6 addresses will be set.
• If you enter '128' in [Prefix Length], the IPv6 address for the machine will be set.
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [DNS Settings] → [DNS Server Address Settings].
6-12
Protocol Settings
8
In <IPv6>, specify the following.
If you want to use dynamic DNS updating, enter the IPv6 address of the DNS server in [Primary DNS Server].
If you do not want to specify a secondary DNS server, leave [Secondary DNS Server] blank.
6
9
Using a TCP/IP Network
• You cannot enter any of the following types of address for [Primary DNS Server] or [Secondary DNS Server]:
- Multicast address
- Address composed entirely of zeros
- Link local address
• If you set <Use DHCPv6> to 'On' in step 5, the IPv6 address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
On the DNS Settings screen, press [DNS Host/Domain Name Settings] → in <IPv6>, specify the
following.
[On] for <Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4>: You can set the same host name or domain name used with IPv4 communication
for IPv6 communication. If you set <Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4> to 'Off', enter the name of the machine in [Host Name]
and the name of the domain the machine belongs to in [Domain Name]. It is necessary to set a host name and domain name if you want
to use dynamic DNS updating.
If you set <Use DHCPv6> to 'On' in step 5, the domain name you set manually will be overwritten. Even if you set <Use Same Host
Name/Domain Name as IPv4> to 'On', the domain name obtained from the DHCPv6 server is used.
Protocol Settings
6-13
10
On the DNS Settings screen, press [DNS Dynamic Update Settings] → in <IPv6>, specify the
following.
[On] for <DNS Dynamic Update>: If your environment includes a dynamic DNS server, you can automatically register the IPv6 address, host
name, and domain name set for the machine in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
[On] for <Register Stateless Address>: You can automatically register a stateless address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
[On] for <Register Manual Address>: You can automatically register a manual address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
[On] for <Register Stateful Address>: You can automatically register a stateful address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.
Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 do not support DHCPv6 servers.
6-14
Protocol Settings
Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6
This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6 using the control panel.
Specify the settings required for your network environment. If you want to use both TCP/IPv4 communications and TCP/IPv6
communications, specify the settings required for both protocols.
After performing this procedure, follow the procedure in “Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings,” on p. 6-23 and “Confirming TCP/IPv6
Settings,” on p. 6-24 to check whether the network settings are correct.
1
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [LPD Print Settings] → specify the following.
[On]: You can use LPD as the print application.
• You can only output a banner page if you are using the PCL Printer Kit or the PS Printer Kit.
• Output of a banner page is set on a print-job basis. Even if [On] is selected for <LPD Banner Page>, a banner page cannot be output for
a print job unless it is set.
Protocol Settings
6-15
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
2
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [RAW Print Settings] → specify the following.
[On]: You can use Raw as the print application.
If you want to establish bidirectional communication, press [On] for <Bidirectional Communication>.
3
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [SNTP Settings] → specify the following.
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
[On] for <Use SNTP>: You can perform time synchronization using SNTP.
Select the interval for performing time synchronization in <Polling Interval>.
In [NTP Server Address], enter the NTP server IP address or host name.
• In order to perform time synchronization through SNTP, it is necessary to set the time zone of the region in which you are using the
machine in advance. For instructions on how to set the time zone, see e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
• If you want to set the digital signature method (see e-Manual > Network) for the IKE (Internet Key Exchange) authentication when
performing IPSec communication, it is necessary to set <Use SNTP> to 'On'.
6-16
Protocol Settings
4
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [FTP Print Settings] → specify the following.
[On] for <Use FTP printing>: You can use FTP as the print application.
In [User], enter the login user name for access to the FTP server.
In [Password], enter the login password for access to the FTP server.
• If you do not specify [User] and [Password], all user names and passwords will be valid.
• The password will appear in the job list as a user name if you enter “anonymous” as a login user name for access to an FTP server without
specifying [User] and [Password], or if you enter “anonymous” in [User]. (To display the job list, press
[Print] → [Log] on the touch panel display.)
5
(Status Monitor/Cancel) →
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [WSD Print Settings] → specify the following.
Protocol Settings
6-17
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
Specify the WSD print settings if you are using Windows Vista/Server 2008.
[On] for <Use WSD>: You can use WSD (Web Services on Devices) as the print application. [Use HTTP] is automatically set to 'On' if you
select [On].
<Use WSD Browsing> is automatically set to 'On' if you set <Use WSD> to 'On', and enables device information to be obtained using WSD.
If you want to respond to multicast discovery requests, set <Use Multicast Discovery> to 'On'.
6
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Use FTP PASV Mode] → specify the following.
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
Whether you use the PASV mode for FTP depends on the network environment you are using and the settings of the file server you are
sending to. Before specifying the PASV mode for FTP, consult your network administrator.
7
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPP Print Settings] → specify the following.
[On]: You can use IPP as the print application. Pressing [On] for [IPP Print Settings] automatically sets [Use HTTP] to 'On'.
To use SSL to encrypt the IPP data, press [On] for <Use SSL>.
If you are using IPP authentication, press [On] for <Use Authentication> → enter the user name to use for IPP authentication in [User], and
the password to use for IPP authentication in [Password].
6-18
Protocol Settings
In order to select [On] for <Use SSL> to allow SSL communication, a key pair is necessary. You can use the preinstalled key pair, or
generate an original key pair with the machine, to set as the default key. For information on the default key, and instructions on how to
generate an original key pair, see e-Manual > Security.
8
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Multicast Discovery Settings] → specify the following.
Optionally, press [Scope Name] and enter the scope name for a multicast discovery.
For instructions on how to deliver and share device information, such as the Address Book and Department ID Management settings
with multiple devices, see e-Manual > Security.
Protocol Settings
6-19
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
[On] for <Response>: You can use device information from other devices, such as an Address Book or Department ID Management
settings, or respond to a multicast discovery from utilities.
9
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Use HTTP] → specify the following.
[On]: You can use the Remote UI, IPP printing, WSD printing, Department ID management password confirmation and WebDAV server.
10
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Proxy Settings] → specify the following.
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
In the following cases, specify the proxy settings, according to the network environment you are using:
• If you perform direct printing from the Remote UI when the Direct Print Kit (for PDF/XPS) is activated
• If you are using the Web Access Software (The Web Access Software is optional software for viewing web pages on the touch panel
display of the machine. For details, see e-Manual > Web Access.)
• If you connect the WebDAV client to the Internet via a proxy, when using a WebDAV server
In [Server Address], enter a proxy server IP address or FQDN (for example, starfish.company.com).
In [Port Number], enter the port number of a proxy server using
-
(numeric keys).
If you want to use a proxy in the same domain, press [On] for <Use Proxy within the Same Domain>.
If you want to use proxy authentication, press [Set Authentication] → [On] for <Use Proxy Auth.> → enter the user name to use for proxy
authentication in [User], and the password to use for proxy authentication in [Password].
6-20
Protocol Settings
If you are using the Direct Print Kit (for PDF/XPS), you can print a file in the PDF, XPS, or PS format by specifying its URL using the Remote
UI. To print a file by specifying its URL using the Remote UI, you need to specify the proxy settings suitable for your environment. (Set in
this step.)
11
On the Network screen, press [Firewall Settings] → [Mac Address Filter] → specify the following.
By specifying the settings described below, you can filter received packets and transmitted packets using MAC (Media Access Control)
addresses and improve security when sending and receiving data. The possibility of a third person gaining unauthorized access can
be reduced by configuring the settings for [MAC Address Filter] in accordance with the environment you are using.
If you want to deny data transmission/reception between a device with a specified MAC address and the machine, set the default
policy for the transmission or reception filter so as to allow transmission/reception, and enter the MAC address to be denied. Data
transmission/reception between the device having the specified MAC address and the machine will be disabled.
If you want to enable data transmission/reception only with a device having a specified MAC address, set the default policy for the
transmission or reception filter so as to deny transmission/reception, and enter the MAC address to be allowed. Data transmission/
reception will be enabled only between the device having the specified MAC address and the machine.
Up to 100 MAC addresses can be specified.
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
● If you want to deny transmission/reception of data with the device having the specified MAC address:
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to 'On'.
☐ Set <Default Policy> to [Allow].
☐ Press [Register] → set the MAC address for which data transmission/reception is to be denied.
● If you want to allow transmission/reception of data only with the device having the specified MAC address:
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to 'On'.
☐ Set <Default Policy> to [Reject].
☐ Press [Register] → set the MAC address for which data transmission/reception is to be allowed.
If you set <Default Policy>to [Reject], data transmission/reception is only possible with the device having the MAC address specified in
this procedure. Be sure to confirm the MAC address when configuring the settings. If a corresponding MAC address does not exist, data
transmission/reception will not be possible.
Protocol Settings
6-21
● If you do not want to restrict data transmission/reception:
☐ Press [Send Filter] or [Receive Filter] → set <Use Filter> to ‘Off’.
12
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Confirm Dept. ID PIN] → specify the following.
[On]: You can confirm the Department ID and password when printing using a driver that supports Windows Vista. [Use HTTP] is
automatically set to 'On' if you select [On].
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
• A key pair to use for encrypted SSL communication is required to confirm Department IDs and passwords. Even if you set <Confirm
Dept. ID PIN> to 'On', Department IDs and passwords cannot be confirmed if the key pair is corrupted or invalid. In this case, erase the
key pair and see e-Manual > Security to register a new key pair.
• If there is no key pair, you cannot set <Confirm Dept. ID PIN> to 'On'. You can use the preinstalled key pair, or generate an original key
pair with the machine, to set as the default key. For information on the default key, and instructions on how to generate an original key,
see e-Manual > Security.
13
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Use WebDAV Server] → specify the following.
[On]: You can access the Advanced Box of the machine from a computer using a WebDAV server. [Use HTTP] is automatically set to 'On' if
you select [On].
Authentication of a computer accessing the Advanced Box, and SSL encrypted communication between the computer and the
machine, are possible using a WebDAV server.
6-22
Protocol Settings
Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings
The following is the procedure for confirming that the network connections are properly set.
1
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPv4 Settings] → [PING Command].
In [PING Command], check the following.
Using a TCP/IP Network
2
6
Pressing [Start] after entering the desired IP address existing on the network displays the result of the PING command on the touch panel
display.
Protocol Settings
6-23
If this result is inappropriate, check the settings described in “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9, “TCP/IPv4 Settings,” on p. 6-3 and “Settings
Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6,” on p. 6-15.
• If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in “Startup Time Settings,” on p. 6-27, execute
the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
• If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network
settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See
“Startup Time Settings,” on p. 6-27 for information on how to set up the startup time.
3
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [SNTP Settings] → check the following.
After pressing [Check NTP Server], if <OK> is displayed, time synchronization is working correctly via SNTP.
If <Error> is displayed, check the settings for [NTP Server Address] set in step 3 of “Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6,” on p. 6-15.
Even if you perform [Check NTP Server], time settings are not updated. Check that communications are possible between the machine and
the NTP server.
Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
The following is the procedure for confirming that the TCP/IPv6 network connections are properly set.
1
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPv6 Settings] → [PING Command].
2
In [PING Command], check the following.
6-24
Protocol Settings
Pressing [Start] after entering an IPv6 address existing on the network in [IPv6 Address] displays the result of the PING command on the
touch panel display.
Pressing [Start] after entering the machine's host name in [Host Name] displays the result of the PING command on the touch panel
display.
If this result is inappropriate, check the settings described in “Interface Settings,” on p. 5-9, “TCP/IPv6 Settings,” on p. 6-9 and “Settings
Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6,” on p. 6-15.
• If you set the startup time of the machine's network functions by following the procedure in “Startup Time Settings,” on p. 6-27, execute
the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
• If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network
settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See
“Startup Time Settings,” on p. 6-27 for information on how to set up the startup time.
3
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [SNTP Settings] → check the following.
After pressing [Check NTP Server], if <OK> is displayed, time synchronization is working correctly via SNTP.
Even if you perform [Check NTP Server], time settings are not updated. Check that communications are possible between the machine and
the NTP server.
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
1
2
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Send] → [E-Mail/I-Fax Settings] →
[Communication Settings].
Specify the mail server for receiving e-mail/I-faxes.
The machine supports both the SMTP and POP3 functions.
The machine can receive I-fax images and communication error notices only.
● If you want to receive e-mail/I-faxes using the machine's own SMTP receiving function:
☐ Register the host name of the machine with the DNS server → specify the following.
Press [On] for <SMTP Receipt> → press [Off ] for <POP>.
In [E-mail Address], enter the e-mail address your machine will use. You can specify any user name (the part of the address located in
front of the @ symbol). Enter the host name after the "@" symbol in the e-mail address.
If you select [Always SSL] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)>, reception of only data encrypted using SSL is allowed and communications
from the host not using SSL are rejected.
If you select [On] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)>, depending on the request from the host, reception of data encrypted using SSL is
allowed only when there is a request from the host.
Protocol Settings
6-25
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
If <Error> is displayed, check the settings for [NTP Server Address] set in step 3 of “Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6,” on p. 6-15.
• Even if you select [On] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)>, the data will not be encrypted if the SMTP host does not support encryption.
• In order to select [Always SSL] or [On] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)> to allow SSL transmission, it is necessary to generate a key pair in
advance. For instructions on how to generate a key pair, see e-Manual > Security.
● If you want to receive e-mail/I-faxes using a POP server:
☐ Press [On] for <POP> → press [Off ] for<SMTP Receive>.
In [E-mail Address], enter the e-mail address your machine will use.
In [POP Server], enter the IP address or name of the POP server using the keyboard on the touch panel display.
In [POP Address], enter the login name for access to the POP server.
In [POP Password], enter the password for access to the POP server.
Set <POP Interval> to the interval you want the POP server to check for incoming e-mail. If the interval is set to '0', the POP server is not
checked automatically. For instructions on how to manually check the POP server, see e-Manual > Scan and Send.
Select the authentication method supported by the POP server from [Standard], [APOP], or [POP AUTH] for <POP AUTH Method>.
If you want to send encrypted data, press [On] for <Allow SSL (POP)>.
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
• If you set more than '10 min' for <POP Interval>, the machine will not enter a complete Sleep mode.
• If the POP server does not support SSL encryption, data is not encrypted when [On] is selected for <Allow SSL (POP)>.
• In order to select [On] for <Allow SSL (POP)> to allow SSL transmission, it is necessary to generate a key pair in advance. For instructions
on how to generate a key pair, see e-Manual > Security.
3
Specify the mail server for sending e-mail/I-faxes.
● If you are using an SMTP server that requires POP before SMTP (method for authenticating users who have
logged in the POP server before sending e-mail):
☐ In [SMTP Server], enter the IP address or name of the SMTP server using the keyboard on the touch panel display.
Press [On] for <POP Authentication before Sending> → press [Off ] for <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)>.
● If you are using an SMTP server that requires SMTP Authentication (method for authenticating users who have
logged in the SMTP server before sending e-mail):
☐ In [SMTP Server], enter the IP address or name of the SMTP server using the keyboard on the touch panel display.
Press [On] for <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> → press [Off ] for <POP Authentication before Sending>.
In [User], enter the user name used for logging in to the SMTP server. If you are using a Microsoft SMTP server, enter the user name in
[User] using the following format: user name@domain name.
In [Password], enter the password used for logging in to the SMTP server.
To encrypt data to be sent using SSL, select [On] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Send)>.
If you want to display the authentication screen when sending, set [Display Auth. Screen When Send].
6-26
Protocol Settings
If the SMTP host does not support encryption, data is not encrypted when [On] is selected for <Allow SSL (SMTP Send)>.
● If you are using an SMTP server that does not require authentication for sending e-mail:
☐ In [SMTP Server], enter the SMTP server IP address or name using the keyboard on the touch panel display.
Press [Off ] both for <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> and <POP Authentication before Sending>
Startup Time Settings
If you connect the machine to a switching hub, it may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are
set correctly.
This occurs because the spanning tree process performed between switching hubs prevents them from communicating with each
other immediately after the machine connects to a switching hub.
In this case, use the following procedure to delay the start of communication.
On the Network screen, press [Startup Settings] → specify the following.
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
1
Press [-] or [+] to set the time period to delay the startup of network communications for the machine.
Protocol Settings
6-27
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
To send data from the machine to a computer on your network, you need to specify the settings of the computer for receiving
data.
You can send data over a TCP/IP network to any of the following:
• FTP server (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, UNIX, Linux, Mac OS X)
• WebDAV server (Windows 2000 Server/2000 Professional/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, UNIX, Linux, Mac OS X)
• Windows shared folder (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008)
• Samba shared folder (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X)
This section describes how to set up a computer as an FTP/WebDAV server.
For instructions on how to configure a Windows and Samba shared folder, see “Setting Up a Computer as a File Server,” on p. 8-6.
• Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
• This section describes only the procedures for setting up a computer to receive data sent from the machine. To send data from the machine to
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
a server on the network, you must enter an address setting from the control panel. For instructions on how to specify recipient address settings,
see e-Manual > Scan and Send.
• The following procedure explains a sample FTP/WebDAV server setup. Depending on your environment, the actual setup procedure may differ.
6-28
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
FTP Server Settings
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista
This section describes the procedures for using the default home directory under [Default FTP Site]. To use other settings, enter
the FTP site and home directory by referring to the IIS documentation.
It is recommended that the FTP server be configured by the network administrator.
In the following procedures, items displayed on the screens for Windows 2000 are used. The items displayed may differ according
to your operating system.
• The use of Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Server 2003/Vista as an FTP server requires the installation of IIS. If IIS is not installed in the
If you are using Windows Vista, a dialog box may be displayed while you are performing the procedure. In this case, enter a user name and
password. For more information, see the manuals provided with the operating system.
1
Log on to Windows as a member of the group with access rights to the directory to be designated as
the FTP site directory → start IIS.
Depending on your environment, the access rights settings for a drive or directory may differ. For details, see the Windows manual.
2
In the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box, on the [Security Accounts] sheet, deselect the option
which allows only anonymous connection.
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6-29
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
computer you are using, you will need to install the version of IIS for the operating system you are using before entering these settings. (See
"System Requirements" in “Sending Data,” on p. 4-6.) For installation procedures, see the manuals provided with your operating system.
• User authentication for access to FTP servers is performed using the local account database of Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Server
2003/Vista used as the FTP server. Therefore, it is not possible to use the account of a domain user registered in Windows 2000 Server/XP
Professional/Server 2003/Vista to send data directly from the machine to FTP servers in other domains.
3
In the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box, on the [Home Directory] sheet, select both [Read]
and [Write].
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
4
Right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties] to open the [System Properties] dialog box → confirm
[Full computer name].
6-30
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
Right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window → under
[System Tools], in [Local Users and Groups], right-click the [Users] folder → click [New User].
6
6
In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password]
→ re-enter the password in [Confirm Password] → click [Create].
Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
If [User must change password at next logon] is selected, any new users added must change their passwords in order to send data from
the machine. (You cannot change the password from the control panel.)
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6-31
Using a TCP/IP Network
5
In the Active Directory environment, the procedures for setting up users differ from the above. For details, see the Windows manual.
7
Set a recipient address using the control panel.
Sample recipient setting:
• Server side settings:
[Full Computer Name]: starfish.organization.company.com
Create a directory named “share” in the specified FTP server’s home directory “\lnetpub\ftproot”, and
then set “share” as the data destination.
• The machine's recipient settings:
<Protocol>:
FTP
[Host Name]:
starfish.organization.company.com
[Folder Path]: share
[User]:
User name entered in step 5
[Password]:
Password for the above user
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
• To use [Full computer name], which was confirmed in step 4, as the host name for [Host Name] as shown in the above example, it is
necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available,
the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
• Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can
be entered for [Folder Path].
• If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
• If you want to send to an IPv4 host using an FTP port other than port 21, set [Host Name] using the following format:
<IPv4 address of FTP server>:<Port number>
Example: 192.168.1.21:21000
• To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
<IPv6 address>:<Port number>
Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000
6-32
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
UNIX/Linux
For more information on the system requirements for using a UNIX/Linux computer as an FTP server, see "System Requirements"
in “Sending Data,” on p. 4-6.
In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use FTP. For details, consult your network administrator.
1
Log in to a workstation as a superuser → set up the users who send documents from the machine,
and their passwords.
Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
3
Create a shared directory to be used for recipient addresses, and then enable read access and write
access by the users who will be sending data.
Set a recipient address using the control panel.
Sample recipient setting:
• Server side settings:
[Host Name]:
starfish
[Domain]:
organization.company.com
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
2
The user’s home directory is /home/hsato, and /home/hsato/share is the data destination
• The machine's recipient settings:
<Protocol>:
FTP
[Host Name]:
starfish.organization.company.com
[Folder Path]:
Enter one of the following:
[User]:
share (when using relative path)
/home/hsato/share (when using absolute path)
User name entered in step 1
[Password]:
Password for the above user
For a sample screen, see the example of Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista screen (See “Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/
Server 2008/Vista,” on p. 6-29.)
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6-33
• To use the host name of the above example for [Host Name], it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and
the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of
the FTP server.
• Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can
be entered for [Folder Path].
• If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
• If you want to send to an IPv4 host using an FTP port other than port 21, set [Host Name] using the following format:
<IPv4 address of FTP server>:<Port number>
Example: 192.168.1.21:21000
• To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
<IPv6 address>:<Port number>
Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000
Mac OS X
1
2
3
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
Log in to Mac OS X as Administrator → start the FTP services under Mac OS X.
Click the [Sharing] icon → [Allow FTP access] → click [Show All] on the toolbar.
Click [Users] to open the [Users] window → enter the name of the user to whom you want to send
data from the machine through Mac OS X → enter the password.
Enter a user name, and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
4
Create a shared folder to which files are to be sent.
Sample setting:
Create a folder named “FTP_Folder” in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder.
5
6-34
Select the shared folder created in step 4 → select [Show Info] from the [File] menu → select
[Privileges] from [Show] → enable read & write access to the folder by the owner and members of the
group to which the owner belongs.
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6
Set a recipient address using the control panel.
Sample recipient setting:
• Server side settings (set using the above procedure):
Create a folder named “FTP_Folder” in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder of the user named “yoko,” and then specify the FTP_Folder as
the folder to which files are sent.
• The machine's recipient settings:
<Protocol>:
FTP
[Host Name]:
IP address of Macintosh
[Folder Path]:
Enter one of the following:
[User]:
Public/FTP_Folder (If you enter a relative path)
/Users/yoko/Public/FTP_Folder (If you enter an absolute path)
User name entered in step 3
[Password]:
Password for the above user
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
• Up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path] on the control panel.
• If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
• If you want to send to an IPv4 host using an FTP port other than port 21, set [Host Name] using the following format:
<IPv4 address of FTP server>:<Port number>
Example: 192.168.1.21:21000
• To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
<IPv6 address>:<Port number>
Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6-35
WebDAV Server Settings
The WebDAV sending function is a function for sending scanned image files, image files for received faxes, or image files sent
from the mail boxes or Memory RX Inbox of the machine, to a WebDAV server directory on the Internet or your intranet, using the
WebDAV protocol.
This section describes the procedure for setting up a WebDAV publishing directory. Setting up a publishing directory enables
users who have the necessary access privileges to manage files in the directory.
It is recommended that the WebDAV server be configured by the network administrator.
IIS for Windows 2000/2000 Server/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista
The procedure below uses items of Windows 2000 as an example. Depending on your environment, the items you see on the
screen may differ.
• If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install the version of IIS for the operating system you are using before
entering these settings. (See "System Requirements" in “Sending Data,” on p. 4-6.) For installation procedures, see the manuals provided with
your operating system.
• Server authentication is required for sending to a WebDAV server. Enable authentication before using a WebDAV server. The authentication
methods available for the server are Anonymous, Basic, or Digest authentication, and authentication errors will occur if you try to use
another authentication method. If the Anonymous authentication method is enabled, access rights are assigned to all users, and IIS always
performs anonymous authentication, even if either of the other two authentication methods are enabled. (The priority level is Anonymous
authentication > Digest authentication > Basic authentication.) If a high level of security is required, disable anonymous authentication. Use
the user names and passwords registered in the address book of the WebDAV server for the Basic and Digest authentication methods. For
instructions on how to set the authentication method for IIS, see the IIS documentation.
• If you use WebDAV transmission with IIS 7.0, use either Basic authentication or Digest authentication.
• When connecting to a WebDAV server via a proxy with Digest authentication set using IIS 6.0, it is necessary to set <Use Divided Chunk Send for
WebDAV TX> to ‘On’ from the control panel of the machine. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
• If you use WebDAV with IIS 7.0, you must download the Microsoft WebDAV Extension from the IIS web site and install it separately. For details,
refer to the IIS documentation.
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
1
Right-click [My Computer] → in the [C:/Inetpub] folder, create a physical directory to use as the
sending destination.
The physical directory cannot be created in the [C: /Inetpub/wwwroot] folder, because the default DACL of wwwroot differs from that of
other directories.
6-36
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
2
Create a virtual directory.
☐ Start IIS → from the IIS snap-in, select the Web site to add a directory to.
☐ On the [Action] menu, point to [New] → select [Virtual Directory].
☐ Follow the instructions on the Virtual Directory Creation Wizard to complete the creation of the directory.
Specify the directory path created in step 1 as a physical path to the virtual directory.
For IIS 7.0, start IIS and right-click Default Web Site in the Connections panes on the left side of the IIS manager, then select [Add Virtual
Directory] and enter an alias and physical path.
3
Select [Write] in the virtual directory properties to give access for writing files to the WebDAV
clients.
If you are using IIS 6.0, click [Allow] for [WebDAV] in [Web Service Extensions] in IIS Manager.
If you are using IIS 7.0, select the virtual directory you have created from the Connections panes on the left side of the IIS manager, then
select [WebDAV Authoring Rules] from [Home]. Select [Add Authoring Rule] from [Actions], and enter the appropriate access settings.
Select [Edit Permissions] from [Actions], and set the access permissions for the physical directory in the [Security] tab of the properties
dialog box.
6
See the IIS documentation to specify the settings for SSL encrypted communication.
Set a recipient address from the control panel.
Sample recipient settings:
• Server side settings:
Create a physical directory named "C:/Inetpub/export/share/home/users/", and then create a virtual directory that links to the physical
directory as the folder to which files are sent.
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6-37
Using a TCP/IP Network
4
5
• The machine's address settings:
<Protocol>:
WebDAV
[Host Name]: https://starfish.cse.canon.co.jp/
[Folder Path]: /export/share/home/users/
User name for the Basic and Digest authentication methods of the WebDAV server
Password for the Basic and Digest authentication method of the WebDAV server
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
[User]:
[Password]:
• Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can
be entered for [Folder Path].
• If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
• If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host name] and [Folder path] may not
be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
• To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
<IPv6 address>:<Port number>
Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000
6-38
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
Apache for Windows 2000/2000 Server/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/UNIX/Linux/Mac OS
X
The following procedures describe how to create the "users/user_name/WebDAV" directory using the procedure for creating the
directory under "C:/Program Files/Apache Group/Apache2" in the Windows file system as an example.
• Apache 1.3 is provided with Mac OS X. If Apache is not installed in the computer you are using, install the version for the operating system
1
Edit httpd.conf.
☐ Erase # on the left of the line to enable the WebDAV modules.
Directive to be changed:
• Before change
#LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so
#LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so
• After change
LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so
LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6-39
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
you are using (downloadable from the Apache Software Foundation Web site at http://www.apache.org/.) before entering these settings. (See
"System Requirements" in “Sending Data,” on p. 4-6.) If you want to use SSL, install a version of Apache that supports SSL (downloadable from
the Apache-SSL official Web site at http://www.apache-ssl.org/). After installing Apache, start it and confirm that the Apache service is working
properly.
• If you are using Mac OS X, root has ownership of the Apache setting file (/etc/httpd/httpd.conf). In this case, perform one of the following
procedures before specifying the WebDAV settings. For more information, see the documentation provided with your Macintosh or the Apache
Software Foundation Web site at http://www.apache.org/.
- Obtain root access from the Terminal, using the sudo or su command
- In the Finder, temporarily change the permissions for the Apache setting file to give permission to the user who will set the WebDAV server
(return the permissions for the Apache setting file to their original values after setting the WebDAV server.)
• Server authentication is required for sending to a WebDAV server. Enable authentication before using a WebDAV server. The authentication
methods available for the server are the Basic and Digest authentication methods, and authentication errors will occur if you try to use another
authentication method. If you set both the Basic and Digest authentication methods, the authentication method you set last will be enabled.
Use the user names and passwords registered in the address book of the WebDAV server for authentication. For instructions on how to set
authentication methods, see the Apache Software Foundation Web site at http://www.apache.org/.
☐ Specify the server name.
Directive to be changed:
• Before change
#ServerName localhost:80
• After change
#ServerName localhost:80
ServerName Apache-Server.ccm.canon.co.jp:80
☐ Change the user directory.
Directive to be changed:
• Before change
UserDir "My Documents/My Website"
• After change
#UserDir “My Documents/My Website”
UserDir “C:/Program Files/Apache Group/Apache2/users”
☐ To enable the DAV function, add the following directive:
<Location /~user_name/WebDAV>
DAV On
</Location>
2
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
After specifying the settings for SSL encrypted communication, configure httpd.conf so that the
Apache service starts with SSL support.
For more information, see the Apache Software Foundation Web site at http://www.apache.org/.
3
4
Restart Apache.
Set a recipient address from the control panel of the machine.
Sample recipient settings:
• Server side settings:
Create the "users/user_name/WebDAV" directory under "C:/Program Files/Apache Group/Apache2" as the folder to send files to.
6-40
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
• The machine's address settings:
<Protocol>:
WebDAV
[Host Name]: https://Apache-Server.ccm.canon.co.jp/
[Folder Path]: /~user_name/WebDAV/
[User]:
User name for the Basic and Digest authentication methods of the WebDAV server
[Password]:
Password for the Basic and Digest authentication method of the WebDAV server
• Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can
be entered for [Folder Path].
• If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
• If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host name] and [Folder path] may not
be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
• To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
<IPv6 address>:<Port number>
Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000.
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6-41
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
Using a TCP/IP Network
6
6-42
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
Using a NetWare Network (Windows)
7
$)"15&3
This chapter describes settings and procedures for using the machine with a NetWare network.
NetWare Network Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-1
NetWare Network Setup Procedures
To use a NetWare network, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.
1
NetWare Print Service Settings (See e-Manual > Network)
Specify the NetWare print service settings. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see “Optional Equipment and System
Requirements for Connecting to a Network,” on p. 4-2.)
To specify the settings from the computer, use:
• NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software provided with NetWare)
• Canon utilities
2
Protocol Settings (See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 7-3.)
Specify the protocol settings. To specify the settings, use:
• The machine's control panel
• The Remote UI (via a web browser)
• Canon utilities
3
7
Computer Settings for Printing/Sending a Fax (See e-Manual > Network)
Using a NetWare Network (Windows)
Specify the settings of each computer you use for printing or sending a fax. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see
“Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network,” on p. 4-2.)
• It is recommended that steps 1 and 2 above be performed by the network administrator.
• To configure settings with software other than the control panel of the machine, NWADMIN, or PCONSOLE, TCP/IPv4 protocol must be
supported by your network environment (IPv6 is not supported).
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
7-2
NetWare Network Setup Procedures
Protocol Settings
This section describes how to specify the protocol settings for the machine using the control panel. If you are configuring the
settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.
After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see
e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
On the Network screen, press [NetWare Settings] → specify the following.
7
<Use NetWare>: [On]
Select the frame type for your environment from the Frame Type drop-down list. If you select [Auto Detect], the frame type is automatically
determined.
Select the print service specified in "NetWare Print Service Settings" (e-Manual > Network) from the Print Service drop-down list.
The following print services are available:
• [Bindery PServer]:
Used in the queue server mode (Bindery mode print service).
• [RPrinter]:
Used in the remote printer mode (Bindery mode print service).
• [NDS PServer]:
Used in the queue server mode (NDS print service).
• [NPrinter]:
Used in the remote printer mode (NDS print service).
• If [NetWare Settings] is not displayed, consult your local authorized Canon dealer.
• If you set <Use NetWare> to 'On', the machine will not enter a complete Sleep mode.
Protocol Settings
7-3
Using a NetWare Network (Windows)
1
2
Press [Set] → specify the print service details.
Screen for setting NDS PServer
Screen for setting Bindery PServer
Specify the same tree, context, file server, and print server names that you specified in "NetWare Print Service Settings." (Settings differ
depending on the print service. For print service settings, see e-Manual > Network.)
You can specify the print service settings either by selecting the desired options from the list on the screen that appears when you press
[Browse], or by entering the desired character string for each item.
7
Using a NetWare Network (Windows)
If you want to use [Browse] to specify each item, make sure you press [Browse] after the expiration of the time specified in “Startup Time
Settings,” on p. 6-27.
● Setting NDS PServer or NPrinter in the Browse screen (If the browse right is not limited to the specific user):
☐ Press [Skip Log In] in the Browse screen.
If the browse right is not limited to the specific user, you can specify the print service without having to log in to NetWare.
☐ Select the tree to which the desired print server belongs → select the context to which the desired print server belongs → select
the desired print server.
☐ For NDS PServer, specify each item on the screen for setting NDS PServer if necessary.
● Setting NDS PServer or NPrinter in the Browse screen (If the browse right is limited to the specific user):
☐ In the Browse screen, press the tree to which you want to log in → select the context to which you want to log in.
7-4
Protocol Settings
☐ Press [Log In] → in the Enter Network Password screen, enter the name and password of a user to whom the browse right is
granted.
If the browse right is limited to the specific user, it is necessary to log in to NetWare as a user to whom the browse right is granted.
Enter a user name prefixed with 'CN='. If the password is not specified, leave [Password] blank.
☐ Select the tree to which the desired print server belongs → select the context to which the desired print server belongs → select
the desired print server.
☐ For NDS PServer, specify each item on the screen for setting NDS PServer if necessary.
● Setting Bindery PServer or RPrinter in the Browse screen:
☐ In the Browse screen, select the file server to which the desired print server belongs.
☐ In the Enter Network Password screen, enter the name and password of a user on the file server.
If the password is not specified, leave [Password] blank.
☐ Select the desired print server.
☐ Specify each item on the screen for setting Bindery PServer if necessary.
● Setting NDS PServer or NPrinter using the keyboard on the touch panel display:
☐ In [Tree Name], enter the name of the tree to which the desired print server belongs → in [Context], enter the name of the context
to which the desired print server belongs → in [Print Server Name], enter the name of the desired print server.
☐ For NDS PServer, specify each of the other items if necessary.
● Setting Bindery PServer or RPrinter using the keyboard on the touch panel display:
☐ In [File Server Name], enter the name of the file server to which the desired print server belongs → in [Print Server Name], enter the
name of the desired print server.
☐ For Bindery PServer, specify each of the other items if necessary.
Protocol Settings
7-5
Using a NetWare Network (Windows)
7
Using a NetWare Network (Windows)
7
7-6
Protocol Settings
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
8
$)"15&3
This chapter describes settings and procedures for using the machine with an SMB/CIFS network.
SMB/CIFS Network Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
TCP/IP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
SMB and WINS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Connecting to a TCP/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Connecting to an SMB/CIFS Network and Configuring a Shared Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-1
SMB/CIFS Network Setup Procedures
To use an SMB/CIFS network, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.
1
Protocol Settings (See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 8-3.)
Specify the protocol settings. To specify the settings, use:
• The machine's control panel
• The Remote UI (via a web browser).
2
Computer Settings for Printing/Sending a Fax (See e-Manual > Network)
Specify the settings of each computer you use for printing or sending a fax. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see
“Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network,” on p. 4-2.)
3
Computer Settings for a File Server (See “Setting Up a Computer as a File Server,” on p. 8-6.)
Specify the settings of the computer receiving data sent from the machine.
• It is recommended that steps 1 and 3 above be performed by the network administrator.
• The only base protocols supported by the machine for SMB/CIFS networks are TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6. NetBEUI is not supported (SMB is used as
8
a print application).
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
8-2
SMB/CIFS Network Setup Procedures
Protocol Settings
This section describes how to specify the protocol settings for the machine using the control panel. If you are configuring the
settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.
After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see
e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
TCP/IP Settings
1
Specify the TCP/IP settings.
If you have not entered the TCP/IP settings yet, enter them now. (For more information, see “TCP/IPv4 Settings,” on p. 6-3, “TCP/IPv6 Settings,”
on p. 6-9 and “Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6,” on p. 6-15.)
SMB and WINS Settings
To use the machine on an SMB/CIFS network, specify the SMB settings. The 2.5inch/80GB HDD or 2.5inch/250GB HDD is required
to specify the SMB settings.
Protocol Settings
8-3
8
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
To resolve a name with WINS(Windows Internet Name Service), specify the WINS settings using the following procedure. WINS is
a service for associating a NetBIOS name (which is a computer name or printer name on an SMB/CIFS network) with an IP address.
To use WINS, specify the IP address settings for the WINS server.
1
On the Network screen, press [SMB Server Settings] → select [On] for <Use SMB Server>.
If you set <Use SMB Server> to 'On', the machine will not enter a complete Sleep mode.
2
On the SMB Server Settings screen, specify the following.
[Server]: Enter the name of the computer that the machine will belong to. Be sure to enter a name that is not being used by another
computer or printer on the network.
8
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
[Workgroup]: Enter the name of the workgroup that the machine will belong to. If there are no workgroups in the environment you are
using, create a workgroup in Windows and enter the name of that workgroup.
[Comment]: If necessary, you can enter a comment relating to the machine. When the printer information is displayed, the comment
entered here is also displayed.
[On] for <LM Announce>: The LAN Manager can be informed of the existence of the machine.
[Off ] for <LM Announce>: If the LAN Manager is not required to browse the machine, setting <LM Announce> to 'Off' reduces network
traffic.
3
• You cannot enter the domain name as [Workgroup].
• You cannot enter a character string in [Server] and [Workgroup] that includes blanks.
To set up an SMB printer, press [Set SMB Printer] → specify the following.
[On] for <Use SMB>: You can use SMB print.
[Printer]: Enter the printer name of the machine.
• You cannot enter a character string in [Printer] that includes blanks.
• Depending on the machine you are using, optional equipment is required for printing from a computer or sending a fax. For the
equipment needed, see e-Manual > Optional Products.
8-4
Protocol Settings
4
To use the authentication function for SMB printing, press [SMB Auth. Settings] → specify the
following.
[On] for <Use SMB Authentication>: Only users who have User Access Control for Advanced Box authentication can perform SMB printing.
(For information on User Access Control for Advanced Box, see e-Manual > Security.) For SMB printing, NTLMv1 and NTLMv2 can be
selected both individually or together.
[NTLMv1] for <Authentication Type>: You can use NTLMv1 authentication. Select this setting when using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003.
[NTLMv2] for <Authentication Type>: You can use NTLMv2 authentication. Select this setting when using Windows Vista/Server 2008.
8
On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [WINS Settings] → specify the following.
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
5
[On] for <WINS Resolution>: You can resolve the name with WINS. Enter the IP address of a WINS server in [WINS Server Address].
Enter the [Scope ID] settings if a scope ID is set on the computer in the network environment you are using. The scope ID is an identifier for
determining the range available to a printer or computer. The scope ID set here is used regardless of the setting for <WINS Resolution>.
• If DHCP determines the IP address, the IP address obtained from a DHCP server is overwritten with the IP address of a WINS server
(obtained from the DHCP server), whenever possible.
• If you set a scope ID, the machine cannot communicate with any computer whose scope ID is different from the scope ID you set here.
• If a scope ID is not set on any of the computers in your network environment, leave [Scope ID] blank.
Protocol Settings
8-5
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
To send data from the machine to a computer on your network, you need to specify the settings of the computer for receiving
data. You can send data over an SMB/CIFS network to a Windows or Samba (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X) shared folder. This section
describes how to configure a shared folder.
• Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
• This section describes only the procedures for setting up a computer receiving data sent from the machine. To send data from the machine to a
server on the network, you must enter an address setting from the control panel. For instructions on how to specify recipient address settings,
see e-Manual > Scan and Send.
• The following procedures describe a sample shared folder configuration. Depending on your environment, the actual configuration procedure
may differ.
Connecting to a TCP/IP Network
A computer that receives data sent from the machine must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP
network use. For details, see the manuals provided with your operating system.
You can send data over a TCP/IP network from the machine to an FTP server. For instructions on how to set up an FTP server, see
“Setting Up a Computer as a File Server,” on p. 6-28.
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
8
8-6
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
Connecting to an SMB/CIFS Network and Configuring a Shared Folder
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista
It is recommended that the file server be configured by the network administrator.
The number of users or clients that can access a server running Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista is limited. After
this number of users or clients is reached, it is not possible to send to a server running Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server
2008/Vista.
In the following procedures, items displayed on the screens for Windows 2000 are used. The items displayed may differ according
to your operating system.
If you are using Windows Vista, a dialog box may be displayed while you are performing the procedure. In this case, enter a user name and
password. For more information, see the manuals provided with the operating system.
1
Log on to Windows as an Administrator → in the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box,
select all [Client for Microsoft Networks], [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks], and
[Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
8
2
3
Double-click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] to open the [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] dialog
box.
On the [General] sheet, click [Advanced] → on the [WINS] sheet, click [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP].
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
8-7
4
5
Restart the computer if prompted.
Confirm the computer name.
If you are using Windows 2000, right-click the [My Computer] icon → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window. Rightclick the [Computer Management (Local)] icon → click [Properties] to open the [Computer Management (Local) Properties] dialog box. On
the [Network Identification] sheet, confirm the [Computer name] setting.
8
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
If you are using Windows XP/Server 2003, right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties] → on the [Computer Name] sheet, click [Change].
In the [Computer Name Changes] dialog box, click [More] to open the [DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name] dialog box → confirm
[NetBIOS computer name].
If you are using Windows Server 2008, select [Computer] → [Property] → click [Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings] →
[Change settings]. In the [System Properties] dialog box, on the [Computer Name] page, click [Change]. In the [Computer Name/Domain
Changes] dialog box, click [More] → confirm [NetBIOS computer name] in the displayed dialog box.
If you are using Windows Vista, perform the same operation as with other operating systems to open the [DNS Suffix and NetBIOS
Computer Name] dialog box → confirm the name in [NetBIOS computer name].
8-8
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
6
Right-click the [My Computer] icon → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window →
under [System Tools], in [Local Users and Groups], from the [Users] folder, click [New User].
In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password]
→ re-enter the password in [Confirm Password] → click [Create].
8
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
7
Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters.
If [User must change password at next logon] is selected, any new users added must change their passwords in order to send data from
the machine. (You cannot change the password from the control panel.)
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
8-9
• In an Active Directory environment, the procedures for setting up users differ from the above. For details, see the Windows manual.
• When a computer that one or more users log on to is restricted by the system administrator in an Active Directory environment, the
name of the computer must be registered in the Active Directory. Set the computer name in the user account properties dialog box to
"CANON + the last 8 digits of the MAC address of the computer + 00". For example, if the MAC address of the computer you are using is
"00:00:11:22:33:44", set "CANON1122334400".
8
Open the properties dialog box of the folder you want to share → on the [Sharing] sheet, click [Share
this folder] → enter the share name in [Share name].
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
8
9
Set permissions.
● To create a shared folder on a FAT or FAT32 format disk (If the [Security] tab is not displayed):
8-10
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
☐ Click [Permissions] to display the dialog box.
Select or add the users or groups to whom you want to give access to the shared folder → under [Permissions], select both [Change]
and [Read].
● To create a shared folder on an NTFS format disk:
☐ Select or add the users or groups to whom you want to give access to the shared folder → under [Permissions], select both
[Write] and [Read & Execute], or a higher access authority. For data in the folder, check both [Write] and [Read], or a higher access
authority.
• To display the [Security] tab in Windows XP, open Folder Options → deselect [Use simple file sharing]. However, you can share folders
and files with [Use simple file sharing] selected. Select or deselect [Use simple file sharing] to suit your environment. For more
information, see the manual provided with Windows XP.
• In the Active Directory environment, the procedures for specifying the security settings of the shared folder differ from above. For more
information, see the Windows manual.
10
Set a recipient address using the control panel.
There are three methods for specifying the recipient address; selecting the desired address from the list that appears when you press
[Browse], searching for the address by pressing [Search Host], or entering the address using the keyboard on the touch panel display.
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
8-11
8
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
☐ Display the [Security] sheet.
Sample recipient setting:
• Server side settings (set and confirmed in the above step.):
[Computer name]:
swan
[Share Name]:
share
Create a folder called 'Images' within share, and then specify Images as the recipient for sending.
• The machine's Recipient Settings:
<Protocol>:
Windows (SMB)
[Host Name]:
\\swan\share (Shared folder path)
[Folder Path]: \Images
[User]:
User name entered in the above step.
[Password]:
Password for the above user.
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
8
• If you want to use [Browse] to specify each item, make sure you press [Browse] after the expiration of the time specified in see “Startup
Time Settings,” on p. 6-27.
• Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can
be entered for [Folder Path].
• If you change the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be
able to browse the directories.
• If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not
be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
8-12
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
• You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case:
\\192.168.2.100\share
\\host_name.organization.company.com\share
• You can also specify the user name in the address using the following formats:
- domain_name\user_name (up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the domain name, and up to 20 for the user name)
If you specify the user name in this format, the user authority for the specified domain is applied to SMB communication.
- user_name@organization.company.com (up to 128 characters in total)
Note that the latter is only applicable when sending to a Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista computer that belongs to a
domain containing Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista domain controllers.
Samba (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X)
Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use the Samba. For details, consult your network
administrator.
1
Set up the users who access the Samba shared folder, and their passwords.
Set a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters.
● UNIX/Linux:
8
☐ Log in to a workstation as a superuser, and set the user name and password.
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
● Mac OS X:
☐ See the documentation provided with your Macintosh to set the user name and password.
2
Set a recipient address using the control panel.
There are three methods for specifying the recipient address; selecting the desired address from the list that appears when you press
[Browse], searching for the address by pressing [Search Host], or entering the address using the keyboard on the touch panel display.
Sample recipient setting:
• Server side settings:
[Computer name]:
swan
[Share Name]:
share
Create a folder called 'Images' within share, and then specify Images as the recipient for sending.
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
8-13
• The machine's recipient settings:
<Protocol>:
Windows (SMB)
[Host Name]:
\\swan\share (Shared folder path)
[Folder Path]: \Images
[User]:
User name entered in the above step.
[Password]:
Password for the above user.
For a sample screen, see the example of Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista screen (see p. 8-7).
• If you use [Browse] to specify each item, press [Browse] after the expiration of the time specified in “Startup Time Settings,” on p. 6-27.
• Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can
be entered for [Folder Path].
• If you change the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be
able to browse the directories.
• If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host name] and [Folder path] may not
be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
• You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case.
\\192.168.2.100\share
\\host_name.organization.company.com\share
• You can also specify the user name in the address using the following format.
- domain_name\user_name (up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the domain name, and up to 20 for the user name)
If you specify the user name in this format, the user authority for the specified domain is applied to SMB communication.
Using an SMB/CIFS Network
8
8-14
Setting Up a Computer as a File Server
Using an AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)
9
$)"15&3
This chapter describes settings and procedures for printing via an AppleTalk network.
AppleTalk Network Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Protocol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-1
AppleTalk Network Setup Procedures
To print via an AppleTalk network, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.
1
Macintosh Network Settings
To specify AppleTalk network settings, enable AppleTalk according to the instructions in the documentation provided with your Macintosh.
2
Protocol Settings (See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 9-3.)
Specify the protocol settings. To specify the settings, use:
• The machine's control panel
• The Remote UI (via a web browser)
• Canon utilities
3
Macintosh Print Settings (See e-Manual > Network)
Specify the settings for each computer you use for printing.
• Depending on the machine you are using, you may have to use optional equipment to print via an AppleTalk network. For the equipment
needed, see “Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network,” on p. 4-2.
• It is recommended that the network administrator perform step 2.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, see the manual provided with the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
• If you are using the imagePASS or the ColorPASS, some functions are not available with this machine. For details, see the manual provided with
9
Using an AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)
the imagePASS or the ColorPASS.
9-2
AppleTalk Network Setup Procedures
Protocol Settings
This section describes how to specify the protocol settings for the machine using the control panel. If you are configuring the
settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.
After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see
e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
Depending on the machine you are using, you may have to use optional equipment to print via an AppleTalk network. For the equipment
needed, see “Optional Equipment and System Requirements for Connecting to a Network,” on p. 4-2.
On the Network screen, press [AppleTalk Settings] → specify the following.
9
[On] for <Use AppleTalk>: You can use the AppleTalk network.
In [Service Name], enter a name for the printer not longer than 32 characters.
The name you enter here appears on the Macintosh screen.
If you are using a network that is set up in zones, enter the name of the zone in [Zone].
If you want to use the PS printer driver with the PS Printer Kit, set whether to apply spooling to the print job.
[Spool]: The machine specified in [Service Name] prints only after spooling the print job to the hard disk. If you entered "Printer1" for
[Service Name] and select [Spool] for <Print Mode>, "Printer1_S" is displayed on the Macintosh printer screen.
[Direct]: The machine specified in [Service Name] prints without spooling the print job to the hard disk. If you entered "Printer2" for [Service
Name] and select [Direct] for <Print Mode>, "Printer2_D" is displayed on the Macintosh printer screen.
[Both]: The machine specified in [Service Name] prints either with or without spooling the print job to the hard disk. If you entered
"Printer3" for [Service Name] and select [Both] for <Print Mode>, "Printer3_S" and "Printer3_D" are displayed on the Macintosh printer
screen, enabling you to select whether to spool a print job on the Macintosh screen whenever you perform printing.
• If you set <AppleTalk> to ‘On’, the machine will not enter a complete Sleep mode.
• If there is more than one printer in the same zone, each printer must have a unique name.
• You can also enter a zone name by pressing [Browse] and selecting the appropriate name from the displayed list.
Protocol Settings
9-3
Using an AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)
1
Using an AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)
9
9-4
Protocol Settings
Before Using the Advanced Box
10
$)"15&3
The following operations and settings are required to manage the Advanced Box users and open the Advanced Box to the public by SMB or
WebDAV.
User Access Control for Advanced Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Advanced Box Open to Public Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Using a WebDAV/SMB Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Setting the Authentication Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-1
User Access Control for Advanced Box
User Access Control for Advanced Box is an authentication application that enables you to perform user authentication when
you want to access the Shared/Personal Space in the Advanced Box with authentication management and to use the SMB Print
function when SMB authentication is set. The administrator can set access privilege for the general user for the Shared/Personal
Space to restrict access and output of data for each user.
To specify each setting for User Setting Information Management Service, it is necessary to access and then log in to the machine
from the Web browser. You can access the machine from the portal page of the Remote UI.
1
2
Start your Web browser.
Enter the following URL in [Address].
http://<IP address of the machine or host name>
The [Login] page is displayed.
3
Enter the Department ID and password → click [Administrator Login].
The default setting for both the System Manager ID and System Password is '7654321'. We recommend that you change both the System
Manager ID and System Password.
The portal page of the Remote UI is displayed.
Before Using the Advanced Box
10
10-2
User Access Control for Advanced Box
4
Click [User Access Control for Advanced Box] from the applications on the portal screen.
Before Using the Advanced Box
10
The Log In page for the user management of the Advanced Box is displayed.
User Access Control for Advanced Box
10-3
5
Enter the user name and password → click [Log In].
The default setting for user name is 'Administrator' and the password is 'password'. We recommend that you change both the user name
and password.
The [User Management] page is displayed.
6
Click [Add User].
Before Using the Advanced Box
10
10-4
User Access Control for Advanced Box
7
Enter each item, click [Add].
The new user information is registered.
Before Using the Advanced Box
10
User Access Control for Advanced Box
10-5
Advanced Box Open to Public Settings
You can set whether to make the Advanced Box of the machine open to the public as a WebDAV server or SMB server on the
network. Also, you can set whether to manage authentication for the users of the Advanced Box which is open to the public. If the
authentication management is used, only the users registered in User Access Control for Advanced Box can use the Advanced Box.
(See e-Manual > Security).
The Advanced Box cannot be opened to the public as a WebDAV server and SMB server at the same time.
Using a WebDAV/SMB Server
1
2
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Store/Access Files] → [Advanced Box
Settings] → [Open to Public].
Set whether to open the Advanced Box to public → press [OK].
Before Using the Advanced Box
10
Details of each item are shown below.
[Off ]: The Advanced Box is not open to the public.
[By WebDAV]: The Advanced Box is open to the public as a WebDAV server.
[By SMB]: The Advanced Box is open to the public as an SMB server.
• To open the Advanced Box to the public by SMB, <Use SMB Server> in Preferences (Settings/Registration) must be set to 'On'. (See “SMB
and WINS Settings,” on p. 8-3.)
• To open the Advanced Box to the public by WebDAV, [Use WebDAV Server] in [Network] in Preferences (Settings/Registration) must be
set to ‘On’.
10-6
Advanced Box Open to Public Settings
Setting the Authentication Management
1
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Store/Access Files] → [Advanced Box
Settings] → [Authentication Management].
● If you set the Advanced Box to be open to the public as an SMB server and use authentication management:
☐ Press [On].
To use the authentication management, <Use SMB Authentication> in [SMB Authentication Settings] in Preferences (Settings/
Registration) must be set to 'On' and the authentication type must be set. (See “SMB and WINS Settings,” on p. 8-3.)
● If you set the Advanced Box to be open to the public as a WebDAV server and use authentication management:
☐ Press [On].
☐ Press [Advanced Box Settings] → [WebDAV Server Settings] → [Basic] for the authentication type.
In the Advanced Box settings, in addition to specifying the open to public settings and managing authentication, you can initialize the
shared space and set whether to allow personal space to be created. For more information, see e-Manual > Security.
Also, if you want to access the open to public Advanced Box (Network) of another machine from this machine, you must register the
Advanced Box of another machine as the Network Place. For more information, see e-Manual > Security.
Before Using the Advanced Box
10
Advanced Box Open to Public Settings
10-7
Before Using the Advanced Box
10
10-8
Advanced Box Open to Public Settings
Before Using the Fax Function
11
$)"15&3
This section describes the information you should know before using the Fax function of the machine, such as how to specify fax settings and
how to register user information.
Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Setting the Display Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Selecting the Type of Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Registering the Sending Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Remote Fax Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Server-Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Client-Side Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
11-1
Fax Settings
This section describes the important setting registrations and procedures that must be done before the machine is used for
sending operations.
According to recent amendments to the FCC (Federal Communications Commission) rules governing the use of facsimile
equipment in the United States, the following sender information must be printed on every facsimile transmission:
• Your fax number
• Your personal name or company name
• Time and date of transmission
If you attempt to use the machine without registering the necessary information correctly, the machine may not function properly.
• To send a fax, the FAX Board or the Remote Fax Kit must be available for use.
• This section describes the settings when the FAX Board is attached to the machine.
• For information on the settings when the Remote Fax Kit is used, see “Remote Fax Settings,” on p. 11-9.
Setting the Display Language
If you decide to switch the display language, set Language/Keyboard Switch On/OFF to 'On' before entering characters.
If Language/Keyboard Switch On/OFF is set to 'Off', and then you set it to 'On' after entering characters, the characters may not
be displayed correctly. In this case, either re-enter the characters after setting Language/Keyboard Switch On/OFF to 'On', or enter
characters with Language/Keyboard Switch On/OFF set to 'Off'.
If Language/Keyboard Switch On/OFF is set to 'On', some characters are restricted and cannot be entered. (See e-Manual >
Settings/Registration.)
Before Using the Fax Function
11
11-2
Fax Settings
Selecting the Type of Telephone Line
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.
To set the type of telephone line connected to the machine with the FAX Board installed, check whether it is a rotary dial (rotary
pulse) or a touch-tone type and make the correct setting.
If the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board or Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is installed, perform the same registration procedure for the
additional line, too. (See e-Manual >Settings/Registration.)
The telephone line type you can select here is for line 1. To select the telephone line type for an additional line, see e-Manual >Settings/
Registration.
2
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Send] → [Fax Settings] → [Set Line] → [Line
1] → [Select Line Type].
Select the type of telephone line → press [OK].
If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.
11
Before Using the Fax Function
1
Fax Settings
11-3
Registering the Sending Record
The sending record is printed at the top of every document you send via fax to the recipient.
The registered information is printed, as shown below. Depending upon the model of the machine at the receiving side, this
information may appear on the display while communication is taking place.
Date
Time
Fax Number
05/11/2008 MON 15:00 FAX (404)XXX-XXXX
Sender's
Name (TTI)
Destination
Name
CANON SALES
Atlanta office
Page Number
001/001
Sender Information
• Date and Time
- The date and time of the transmission are recorded.
• Fax Number
- Your machine's fax number is recorded.
• Sender's Name (TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification))
- The name registered as the Sender Name is recorded.
• Destination Name
- If you send an original and select a destination from the Address Book, the stored destination's name appears on the sending
record. (See e-Manual > Using the Machine to Send/Receive a Fax.)
• Page Number
- The current page number out of the total number of pages of the original is recorded.
Before Using the Fax Function
11
• You can set the machine so that the sending record is not printed. However, for users in the United States, this information must be printed
at the top of every fax document that you send. Therefore, TX Terminal ID in <Common Settings> in [Send] in Function Settings (from the
Settings/Registration screen) must always be set to 'On'. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
• If the machine is set so that the sending record is printed at the top of the recording paper, and not all of the items are registered, only the
required registered items and the total number of original pages are printed.
• To print the destination's name on the recipient's paper set [Display Destination Unit Name] to 'On' in TX Terminal ID in Function Settings (from
the Settings/Registration screen). (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
• You can select the login user’s name as the Sender Name if the SSO-H login service is being used. (The login name is displayed in <99> of
Sender Names (TTI).) For more information on the SSO-H login service, see e-Manual > MEAP.
11-4
Fax Settings
Setting the Current Date and Time
Setting the current date and time is very important. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for
functions that require them.
• GMT:
The time at the Greenwich Observatory in England is called GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time).
The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the
difference in hours (up to 12 hours) from GMT (0 hours). A time zone is a region
throughout which this time difference is the same.
• Time Zone:
• Daylight Saving Time:
In some countries, time is advanced throughout the summer season. The period in
which this is applied is called "Daylight Saving Time."
You can also specify to automatically synchronize the date and time with a server on the network from the Settings/Registration screen. (See
“TCP/IPv4 Settings,” on p. 6-3.)
1
2
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Preferences] → [Timer/Energy Settings] → [Date & Time Settings].
Enter the current date (month, day, year) and time using
-
(numeric keys).
Before Using the Fax Function
11
Enter the month and the day using four digits (including zeros).
Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits (including zeros) without a space.
Examples:
May 6
7:05 a.m.
11:18 p.m.
→
→
→
0506
0705
2318
If you make a mistake when entering values, press
(Settings/Registration) → enter the values again, starting with the month.
● If you are setting the Time Zone:
☐ Press the Time Zone drop-down list → select the time zone in which the machine is located.
● If you are setting Daylight Saving Time:
☐ Press [On] → [Start Date].
☐ Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists, respectively.
☐ Press [-] or [+] to enter the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take effect → press [OK].
☐ Press [End Date] → select the month, day, and time at which Daylight Saving Time ends → press [OK].
If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time of the machine one hour forward at the specified date
and time.
3
Press [OK].
Fax Settings
11-5
Registering Your Machine's Fax Number
You must store your machine's fax number. This number is printed on the document that you fax to the receiving party.
The number may also be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine, depending on their type of
machine.
The phone number you can register here is for line 1. To register the phone number for an additional line, see e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
1
2
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Send] → [Fax Settings] → [Set Line] → [Line
1] → [Register User Telephone No.].
Enter the unit’s telephone number using
-
(numeric keys) → press [OK].
11
Details of each item are shown below.
Before Using the Fax Function
[+]:
[Space]:
Press to insert a space between the area code and the local fax number.
Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.
Press to move the position of the cursor.
[ ][ ]:
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
11-6
Fax Settings
Registering the Unit's Name
Your name or company's name must be registered as the unit's name (a department name is optional).
The registered unit name can be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine and/or printed at the top
of the fax documents that you send as the sender's information. Some fax models also display sender information on the touch
panel display during transmission.
• It is necessary to register a separate Unit Name if you have an additional line. See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
• The unit name can be printed in the TX Terminal ID.
2
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Send] → [Fax Settings] → [Set Line] → [Line
1] → [Register Unit Name].
Enter a name → press [OK].
11
Before Using the Fax Function
1
Fax Settings
11-7
Registering Sender Names
For fax, you can register any name as the Sender Name, such as the section or department’s name, or an individual’s name.
The registered Sender Name can be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party’s machine and/or printed at the
top of the documents that you send as the sender’s information.
You can set to display/print the Sender Name instead of the name stored as the unit’s name from the Options screen. (See e-Manual > Using
the Machine to Send/Receive a Fax.)
1
2
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Send] → [Fax Settings] → [Register Sender
Name (TTI)] .
Select the number under which you want to register the Sender Name → press [Register/Edit].
11
You can store up to 99 sender names (01 to 99).
Before Using the Fax Function
To delete a stored Sender Name, select the number under which the name is registered → press [Delete]. Only one sender name can be
deleted at a time.
If logging in using SSO-H, the login name is displayed in <99> of Sender Name (TTI). In this case, you can register, edit, or delete the Sender
Name in <99>. For more information on the MEAP login service, see e-Manual > MEAP.
3
11-8
Enter the Sender Name → press [OK].
Fax Settings
Remote Fax Settings
You can send/receive faxes on an imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine even if the machine is not connected to a telephone
line, by using a remote fax server.
To send and receive remote faxes, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.
1
Server-Side Settings (See “Server-Side Settings,” on p. 11-9.)
Specify the settings for the imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine that is being used as a remote fax server.
2
Client-Side Settings (See “Client-Side Settings,” on p. 11-10.)
Specify the settings for the imageRUNNER ADVANCE series machine that is sending and receiving remote faxes.
Server-Side Settings
Specify Whether to Send Faxes from the Client
You can specify whether to send faxes from the client.
If the machine is used as the server machine of the Remote Fax, set [Dedicated Port Settings] (Preferences) to 'On'. (See e-Manual > Network.)
2
3
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Send] → [Fax Settings] → [Remote Fax
Settings].
11
Press [Use Remote Fax] on the Remote Fax Settings screen.
Before Using the Fax Function
1
Select [On] or [Off] for <Use Remote Fax>.
<Use Remote Fax>
[On]: You can use the Remote Fax function.
[Off ]: You cannot use the Remote Fax function.
Remote Fax Settings
11-9
Forwarding Client Settings
You can specify the settings to forward a received fax as an I-fax to the client. To forward faxes, it is necessary to register the client’s
I-fax address as the forwarding destination on the server machine, and specify any necessary forwarding settings. For information
on forwarding settings, see e-Manual > Settings/Registrations.
Client-Side Settings
Remote Fax TX Settings
You can set the Remote Fax TX settings for when you are using the machine as a client.
For information on necessary optional equipment to use this function, see e-Manual > Optional Products.
■ Remote Fax TX Server Address
You can specify the IP address or the host name for the imageRUNNER ADVANCE series (Remote Fax Server) on the server-side.
To specify the IP address, you can register the IPv4 address and IPv6 address.
■ TX Timeout
If the TX Timeout time is set and the set time has elapsed, the remote fax job is canceled when the Remote Fax Server is not responding.
■ Number of Lines for Sending
You can set the number of lines you can select when sending remote fax. If Remote Fax Server is connected to multiple telephone lines, you
can set multiple lines.
■ Priority TX
You can select the priority line. When the priority line is selected and the line is not in use, the machine sends the fax documents with the line
set on [Priority TX]. When the priority line is not selected, the machine selects the line automatically.
Before Using the Fax Function
11
11-10
Remote Fax Settings
1
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Function Settings] → [Send] → [Fax Settings] → [Remote Fax TX
Settings].
● To specify the remote fax server address:
☐ Press [Remote Fax Server Address].
☐ Enter the host name or the IP address → press [OK].
A host name is a name assigned to a host computer that provides services on the network. Enter the name for Remote Fax Server.
● To specify the TX Timeout settings:
☐ Press [TX Timeout].
☐ Specify the TX timeout time by pressing [-] or [+] → press [OK].
● To select the number of lines to use for sending:
☐ Press [No. of Sending Lines].
☐ Set the telephone line number to use for sending.
● To select the priority line:
☐ Press [Select Priority Line].
☐ Select [Auto] or the line to use as a priority.
Remote Fax RX Settings
You can specify the settings from receiving remote faxes for the client-side. To receive remote faxes, it is necessary to specify the
settings to receive forwarded documents from the server machine as an I-fax. For information on I-fax settings, see “Sending EMail/I-Faxes,” on p. 2-7.
Before Using the Fax Function
11
Remote Fax Settings
11-11
Before Using the Fax Function
11
11-12
Remote Fax Settings
Before Printing from Computers
12
$)"15&3
To print from a computer, you must install the printer driver and set up the printer configuration using the printer driver.
Installing the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Setting Up the Printer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
For Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Other Software Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
12-1
Installing the Printer Driver
The printer driver is software that is required to print from applications on your computer. The printer driver also enables you to
configure settings relating to printing.
System Requirements
The following system environments are necessary in order to use the printer driver.
Supported operating systems may differ according to the printer driver version you are using.
■ For Windows:
• Operating Systems:
- Microsoft Windows 2000
- Microsoft Windows XP
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Microsoft Windows Vista
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008
• Computer:
- Any computer that runs the above systems
• Memory:
- The amount of memory required to run the above systems correctly
■ For Mac:
• Operating Systems:
- UFR II Printer Driver: Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later
- PS Printer Driver: Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later
• Computer:
- Any computer that runs the above systems
• Memory:
- The amount of memory required to run the above systems correctly
Before Printing from Computers
12
12-2
Installing the Printer Driver
Selecting the Appropriate Printer Driver
The printer driver is installed from a User Software CD-ROM.
If there is more than one CD-ROM, use the following information as a reference and select the appropriate CD-ROM and printer
driver.
The available CD-ROM may differ, depending on the machine and the system environment you are using.
■ Content of Each CD-ROM:
Before Printing from Computers
12
Installing the Printer Driver
12-3
■ Features of the Printer Driver
UFR II Printer Driver:
Using the UFR II printer driver, the various data processing tasks conventionally executed within the printer are appropriately divided between
the host PC and the printer to greatly reduce the overall printing time.
The workload can be delegated to match the output data, thus realizing a significant increase in speed through optimization.
PCL Printer Driver:
The PCL5c, PCL5e, and PCL6 printer drivers can be used with most kinds of business application software. The PCL5c printer driver is for color
printers, the PCL5e printer driver is for black-and-white printers, and the PCL6 printer driver is for both color and black-and-white printers. PCL6
is an advanced version of PCL5c and PCL5e, and offers superior printing quality and speed. The PCL5e printer driver is provided as standard
with black-and-white printers.
PS Printer Driver:
The PS printer driver converts print data from applications into data for use with PS printers, and sends it to the printer. As well as converting
print data, it can also enable you to configure settings relating to finishing and detailed settings such as color adjustment, and provides an
appropriate print environment for desktop publishing and publishing on demand.
You can confirm what printer driver(s) you can use by following the procedure below.
1. Press [Counter Check] on the touch panel display.
2. In the Counter Check screen, press [Device Configuration].
3. Confirm the printer driver name displayed under [Option].
Before Printing from Computers
12
12-4
Installing the Printer Driver
Installation
For details about the installation procedure, refer to the "Printer Driver Installation Guide" if you are using Windows, or the "Mac
UFR II Driver Guide" or "Mac PS Driver Guide" if you are using a Mac OS.
■ CD-ROM Menu (Windows):
From the menu screen of the CD-ROM, you can begin installing the printer driver, or display the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
You cannot view the Printer Driver Installation Guide after installation has started. If you want to view the Printer Driver Installation Guide, do so before
you start the installation.
Before Printing from Computers
12
Installing the Printer Driver
12-5
■ Starting Installation (Mac):
Insert the CD-ROM into your Mac CD-ROM drive and double-click the CD icon that appears on your desktop. You can find the installer and
Driver Guide in the folder(s) with the printer driver name(s).
Double-click the installation icon in the installer set folder to start the installation.
■ Viewing the Driver Guide (Mac):
Double-click the PDF icon in the installation set folder to view the driver guide.
Before Printing from Computers
12
12-6
Installing the Printer Driver
Setting Up the Printer Configuration
To correctly use the functions of this product, you must set the printer options using the printer driver.
For Windows
Printer options are set from the [Device Settings] sheet of the printer driver.
The [Device Settings] sheet is displayed by right-clicking the printer you are using in the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] folder
and selecting [Properties].
See the Printer Driver Installation Guide or the online help for details about the installation procedure.
Click [Get Device Status] to obtain information about options installed and set in the device.
If you are using the printer as a shared printer, and have installed "Canon Driver Information Assist Service" in the print server, you
can use the [Get Device Status] function. For details about the "Canon Driver Information Assist Service" installation procedure,
see the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
Setting Up the Printer Configuration
12-7
12
Before Printing from Computers
If you cannot obtain the device status, set up the configuration you want to use manually by clicking the appropriate check boxes
or selecting the appropriate items from lists.
For Mac
Display the [Printer Information] dialog box of the printer driver to obtain the device status.
The [Printer Information] dialog box is displayed by clicking [Printer Info] in any of the preferences panes of the printer driver.
See the Mac Printer Driver Guide or the online help for details about the installation procedure.
Depending on the type and version of the printer driver and the printer connection method, you may have to set the printer options manually.
For details, see the Online Manual (PDF).
Before Printing from Computers
12
12-8
Setting Up the Printer Configuration
Other Software Programs
The following software programs are included on the User Software CD-ROM. Available software programs vary depending on the
system configuration.
■ Canon Font Manager (Windows)
Use this software to manage fonts and view them accurately in Windows. Double-click [Canonfm] → the [Setup.exe] icon to install the software.
For more information, see the Readme.txt file located in \Canonfm\program files\Canon\Font Manager\English.
Only the PCL User Software CD-ROM includes this software.
■ PPD file
Use the PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file to print from QuarkXPress and PageMaker with the PS Printer Driver.
For information on installing the PPD file see the following documents.
Windows:
Mac OS 9: Mac OS X:
Printer Driver Installation Guide
Readme.pdf located in \PS_PPD\us_eng\MacOS9
PPD_Guide.pdf located in \PS_PPD\us_eng\MacOSX
Only the PS User Software CD-ROM includes this software.
Before Printing from Computers
12
Other Software Programs
12-9
Before Printing from Computers
12
12-10
Other Software Programs
Before Sending Faxes from Computers
13
$)"15&3
In order to send faxes from computers, you must install the fax driver and set up the fax configuration using the fax driver.
Installing the Fax Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Setting Up the Fax Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
For Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13-1
Installing the Fax Driver
The fax driver is software that is required to send faxes from applications on your computer. The fax driver also enables you to
configure settings relating to fax transmission.
Install the fax driver from the FAX Driver Software CD-ROM. The contents of the CD-ROM are as follows.
System Requirements
The following system environments are necessary in order to use the fax driver.
Supported operating systems may differ according to the fax driver version you are using.
■ For Windows:
• Operating Systems:
- Microsoft Windows 2000
- Microsoft Windows XP
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003
- Microsoft Windows Vista
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008
• Computer:
- Any computer that runs the above systems
• Memory:
- The amount of memory required to run the above systems correctly
Before Sending Faxes from Computers
13
13-2
Installing the Fax Driver
Installation
For details about the installation procedure, refer to the "Fax Driver Installation Guide" if you are using Windows.
From the menu screen of the CD-ROM, you can begin installing the fax driver, or display the Fax Driver Installation Guide.
■ CD-ROM Menu (Windows):
You can install the fax driver and display the Fax Driver Installation Guide from the CD-ROM Menu screen.
You cannot view the Fax Driver Installation Guide after installation has started. If you want to view the Fax Driver Installation Guide, do so
before you start the installation.
Before Sending Faxes from Computers
13
Installing the Fax Driver
13-3
Setting Up the Fax Configuration
To correctly use the functions of this product, you must set the fax options using the fax driver.
For Windows
Fax options are set from the [Device Settings] sheet of the fax driver.
The [Device Settings] sheet is displayed by right-clicking the printer you are using in the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] folder
and selecting [Properties].
See the Fax Driver Installation Guide or the online help for details about the installation procedure.
13
Before Sending Faxes from Computers
Click [Get Device Status] to obtain information about options installed and set in the device.
If you cannot obtain the device status, set up the configuration you want to use manually by clicking the appropriate check boxes
or selecting the appropriate items from lists.
If you are using the fax as a shared fax, and have installed "Canon Driver Information Assist Service" in the print server, you can use
the [Get Device Status] function. For details about the "Canon Driver Information Assist Service" installation procedure, see the Fax
Driver Installation Guide.
13-4
Setting Up the Fax Configuration
Before Using the Remote Scan Function
14
$)"15&3
In order to use this product as a network scanner, you must install the scanner driver.
Installing the Scanner Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Settings Required Prior to Remote Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14-1
Installing the Scanner Driver
The scanner driver is a driver for using digital multi-purpose printers on a network as scanners. Settings relating to scanning are
made using the scanner driver.
The scanner driver is installed from the same User Software CD-ROM as the printer driver. The contents of the CD-ROM are as
follows.
■ Network ScanGear/Color Network ScanGear
These are scanner drivers that are called from TWAIN-compatible applications. Originals are scanned using these drivers.
Examples of applications that support TWAIN include the following.
• Adobe Photoshop
• Adobe Acrobat
• Microsoft Word/Excel/PowerPoint etc. in Office 2000 or later
Before Using the Remote Scan Function
14
14-2
Installing the Scanner Driver
System Requirements
The following system environments are necessary in order to use the scanner driver.
■ Software:
• Operating Systems:
- Microsoft Windows 98 (Network ScanGear Only)
- Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Network ScanGear Only)
- Microsoft Windows 2000
- Microsoft Windows XP (32bit)
- Microsoft Windows Server 2003 (32bit)
- Microsoft Windows Vista (32bit)
- Microsoft Windows Server 2008 (32bit) (Color Network ScanGear Only)
• Application Software:
- TWAIN-compatible applications (Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word/Excel/PowerPoint etc. in Office 2000 or
later)
■ Hardware:
• Computer
- Any computer that can run the supported systems
• Hard disk space
Installing the Scanner Driver
14-3
14
Before Using the Remote Scan Function
- When installing: 100MB or more (recommended)
- When scanning: two or more times the amount of image data being scanned
• Main memory (Color Network ScanGear)
- For Windows 2000: 96MB or more (128MB or more recommended)
- For Windows XP: 128MB or more (192MB or more recommended)
- For Windows Server 2003: 128MB or more (256MB or more recommended)
- For Windows Vista: 512MB or more (1GB or more recommended)
- Windows Server 2008: 512MB or more (2GB or more recommended)
• Main memory (Network ScanGear)
- For Windows 98/Me: 64MB or more (96MB or more recommended)
- For Windows 2000: 32MB or more (48MB or more recommended)
- For Windows XP: 96MB or more (128MB or more recommended)
- For Windows Server 2003: 128MB or more (256MB or more recommended)
- For Windows Vista: 512MB or more (1GB or more recommended)
• A display with a resolution of at least 640 x 480 (800 x 600 or more recommended) and capable of displaying at least 256 colors.
• A network host adapter capable TCP/IP and UDP/IP communication on an Ethernet network.
When scanning large numbers of images or images containing large amounts of image data, an insufficient memory error or notable loss of
scanning speed may occur. If this happens, the following procedures should prove useful.
- Increase the amount of hard disk space by deleting or otherwise appropriately processing unnecessary files on the hard disk etc. to ensure
sufficient hard disk space.
- Rescan with reduced resolution.
- Increase the amount of RAM.
- Increase the amount of virtual memory to the highest possible.
- Divide originals into several sets and then scan them separately.
Installation
For details about the installation procedure, refer to the "Network ScanGear Installation Guide".
From the menu screen of the CD-ROM, you can begin installing the scanner driver, or display the Network ScanGear Installation
Guide.
You cannot view the Network ScanGear Installation Guide after installation has started. If you want to view the Network ScanGear Installation
Guide, do so before you start the installation.
Before Using the Remote Scan Function
14
14-4
Installing the Scanner Driver
Settings Required Prior to Remote Scanning
Once you have installed the scanner driver, the following settings are required in order to perform remote scanning.
For details about this procedure, see the Network ScanGear Installation Guide.
■ Switching the Scanner Online and Offline
In order to start the scanner driver and scan, the scanner must be set to [Online] beforehand at the device.
When the scanner is online, communication with devices connected over a network is possible and the scanner can receive data from
computers.
■ Selecting the Network Scanner You Want to Use
In order to scan using Network ScanGear or Color Network ScanGear, select the device on the network that you want to use as a scanner using
the ScanGear Tool. Because a scanner is not selected immediately after installation, this operation must be performed before use.
The ScanGear Tool is software that is installed together Network ScanGear/Color Network ScanGear.
Before Using the Remote Scan Function
14
Settings Required Prior to Remote Scanning
14-5
Before Using the Remote Scan Function
14
14-6
Settings Required Prior to Remote Scanning
Managing the Machine from a Computer
15
$)"15&3
This section describes the system requirements and preparations required for starting the Remote UI and SMS, which are used to manage the
machine from a computer.
System Requirements for Using the Remote UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Before You Start the Remote UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Enabling the Remote UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
System Requirements for Using SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Before Starting SMS (Preparations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Enabling the Machine to be Accessed from Web Browsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15-1
System Requirements for Using the Remote UI
The system requirements for the Remote UI are as follows:
■ Windows
Operating System Software
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista
Web Browsers
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6, or later
■ Macintosh
Operating System Software
Mac OS 10.3, or later
Web Browsers
Safari 1.3.2, or later
• Available browsers may be limited depending on the login services for the MEAP function you are using. For instructions on how to use the
login services, see e-Manual > MEAP.
• The appearance of the Remote UI screens may vary, depending on the type and version of the Web browser that you are using.
• This machine is compliant with IPv6 addresses. To access IPv6 addresses, your environment must be compliant with IPv6.
Apart from those mentioned above, no other software, such as a web server, is necessary. (There already is a web server inside the machine.)
Managing the Machine from a Computer
15
15-2
System Requirements for Using the Remote UI
Before You Start the Remote UI
Before you start the Remote UI, perform the following:
■ Specify the Network Settings
Specify the settings under Network in Preferences (from the Settings/Registration screen) and find out the machine's IP address. If you do not
know the machine's IP address, consult your network administrator. (See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.)
■ Enable the Remote UI
Set Remote UI in Management Settings (from the Settings/Registration screen) to 'On'. It is also recommended that Device Information Settings
in Device Management (from the Settings/Registration screen) is configured.
• Connection via a proxy server is not possible. If your system environment has a proxy server, perform the following setting. (Settings vary
according to the system environment, consult your network administrator.)
- Enter the IP address of the machine into Exceptions in the web browser proxy server settings.
• You must set your web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript. Otherwise, you will not be able to change the machine's settings using
the Remote UI.
• If the control panel of the machine is being used for a particular operation and if you use the same operation on the Remote UI, the last setting
is activated.
• If multiple Remote UIs are running simultaneously, the latest setting that was made is enabled. It is recommended that only one Remote UI be
running at a time.
• To enter characters from a web browser, use the characters that you can enter from the touch panel display of the machine. If you use the other
characters, they may not be displayed/recognized properly on the machine.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
15
Before You Start the Remote UI
15-3
Enabling the Remote UI
You must use the machine's control panel to enable the Remote UI.
By setting [Remote UI] to ‘On’, you can open a necessary port. However, it is recommended that it is set to ‘Off’, if a port is not used. If you leave
the port open, an unauthorized user may access the machine.
1
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Management Settings] → [License/Other] → [Remote UI].
If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using
(numeric keys) → press
(Log In/Out).
2
-
Select [On] → select whether to use SSL.
Select [Off ] to disable the Remote UI.
<Use SSL>:
[On]: Allows secured transmission using SSL.
[Off ]: Prohibits secured transmission using SSL.
<Use Reference Print>:
[On]: Allows printing by entering its URL.
[Off ]: Prohibits printing by entering its URL.
Managing the Machine from a Computer
15
Any changes made to <Use SSL> are also applied to <Use SSL> in <Use HTTP> in MEAP Settings in Management Settings (from the
Settings/Registration screen).
3
15-4
Press [OK] repeatedly until the Top screen appears.
Before You Start the Remote UI
Turn OFF the main power of the machine, and then turn ON the main power again.
The [Remote UI] setting is made effective only after turning the machine's main power OFF, and then ON.
For information on how to turn ON and OFF the main power of the machine, see Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This Machine."
15
Managing the Machine from a Computer
4
Before You Start the Remote UI
15-5
System Requirements for Using SMS
SMS can be used in the following system environments:
■ Operating System/Web Browsers
Operating System Software
Web Browsers
Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Vista
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Mac OS X 10.3
Safari 1.3.2
Mac OS X 10.4
Safari 2.0.4
Mac OS X 10.5
Safari 3.0.4
Safari 3.1.2
Your browser requires the following settings:
- JavaScript should be enabled.
- Cookies should be enabled for each session.
No web server or software other than that described above is required (a web server is included in the supported machine).
Managing the Machine from a Computer
15
15-6
System Requirements for Using SMS
Before Starting SMS (Preparations)
Before logging in to the SMS, start the machine and follow the procedure below:
■ Specify the Network Settings
Specify the settings under Network in Preferences (from the Settings/Registration screen) and find out the machine's IP address.
If you do not know the machine's IP address, consult your network administrator. (See “Protocol Settings,” on p. 6-3.)
■ Enable Access to the Machine from the Web Browser
Set [Use HTTP] to ‘On’ in [TCP/IP Settings] in [Network] in Preferences (Settings/Registration).If it is not set to ‘On’, you cannot access the
machine from the Web browser.
• You cannot connect to the machine via a proxy server. Specify the following settings if you are working in an environment using a proxy server
(as these settings differ depending on the network environment, consult the network administrator).
- In the proxy server settings of your web browser, add the IP address of the machine to the [Exceptions] (addresses that do not use a proxy)
list.
• You cannot use SMS if your web browser is not set to enable cookies and JavaScript.
• When entering characters from your web browser, use characters that can be entered from the touch panel display of the machine. Otherwise,
the characters may not be displayed or recognized correctly on the touch panel display.
Enabling the Machine to be Accessed from Web Browsers
Use to access the machine from a Web browser to use the MEAP function.
• The default setting is 'On'.
• By setting [Use HTTP] to ‘On’, you can open a necessary port. However, it is recommended that it is set to ‘Off’, if a port is not used. If you leave
the port open, an unauthorized user may access the machine.
Press
(Settings/Registration) → [Preferences].
15
Managing the Machine from a Computer
1
Before Starting SMS (Preparations)
15-7
2
Press [Network] → [TCP/IP Settings] → [Use HTTP].
3
Press [On].
[On]: HTTP server is used.
[Off ]: HTTP server is not used.
• To use SSL, set [Use SSL] in [MEAP Settings] in [License/Other Settings] in [Management Settings].
• Settings for [Use SSL] are also applied to the settings for [Use SSL] in [Remote UI] in [Management Settings].
• To set <Use SSL> to ‘On’, it is necessary to set the key pair and server certificate necessary for performing Encrypted SSL communications
in [Certificate Settings] in [TCP/IP Settings] of the machine. For information on generating the key for SSL, see e-Manual > Security.
15
Managing the Machine from a Computer
4
Press [OK].
The selected mode is set.
5
6
Press [OK] repeatedly until the Top screen appears.
Turn the main power of the machine OFF, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the power ON.
The setting for [Use HTTP] and [Use SSL] is activated only after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then
back ON). For instructions on turning the power ON/OFF, see Chapter 1, "Before You Start Using This Machine."
15-8
Before Starting SMS (Preparations)
Appendix
16
$)"15&3
This section includes the index.
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Counter Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Print Log List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
Device Information Delivery Destination List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Device Information Communication Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Send Job List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Fax Multi TX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Fax RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Fax Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Forwarding Conditions List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Registered LDAP Server List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Address Book List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Store Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
User’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
Color Image Reader Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Color Image Reader Unit-B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Paper Deck Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Inner Finisher-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
Staple Finisher-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-25
Booklet Finisher-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-27
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29
Inner 2 Way Tray-F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-30
Copy Tray-J1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-30
Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
Super G3 FAX Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
Send Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Network Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-34
Provide Adequate Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-35
CANON imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030 SERIES LIMITED WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-36
TERMS OF imageWARE REMOTE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-37
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-38
Number of Enterable Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-38
Capacity of Various Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-42
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-45
16-1
Reports
All of the following conditions must be met for the report to be printed.
• There is a paper drawer with [Other] in [Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off] in Function Settings (Settings/Registration) set to 'On'.
• In that paper drawer, paper with one of the following sizes is loaded.
- 11" × 17"
- LTR
- LTRR
- LGL
• That paper is one of the following types.
- Plain 1 (17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 81g/m2))
- Plain 2 (20 to 28 lb bond (82 to 105g/m2))
- Recycled (17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 81g/m2))
- Thin (14 to 17 lb bond (52 to 63g/m2))
- Color (17 to 20 lb bond (64 to 81g/m2))
However, if [Consider Paper Type] for Copy is set to 'On' in [Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off] in Function Settings (Settings/Registration),
paper is not fed from the paper drawer specified for color paper.
Counter Report
You can print the Copy, Print, and Send counter as a counter report. You can print a counter report from the counter confirmation
screen. (See e-Manual > Basic Operations.)
■ Total Counter Type
Prints the total counter type that is displayed on the counter confirmation screen.
■ Count
Prints the number for each total counter type.
■ Send/Fax Counter Type
Prints the counter type that is displayed on the send/fax counter confirmation screen.
If the FAX board or the Remote FAX Kit is not installed, <Send Counter> is displayed.
16
Appendix
■ Count
Prints the number for each counter type.
16-2
Reports
Print Log List
The print log list contains information about past print jobs. You can print the print log list from the Status Monitor/Cancel screen.
(See e-Manual > Status Monitor/Cancel)
■ DEPT. ID
If a Department ID is set, it is listed at the top of the log. Print logs are printed for each Department ID.
■ JOB NO.
Prints the four digit number which is automatically assigned to a print job that is accepted.
■ TIME
Prints the date and time (in 24-hour notation) when a print job was completed.
■ JOB NAME
Prints the name of the printed document, or the type of print job.
■ USER
Prints the name of the user who sent the print job to the machine.
■ PGS.
Prints the number of pages in each copy set and the number of sets made.
■ RESULT
Prints "OK" or "NG."
"OK" is printed when the print job completes successfully.
"NG" (No Good) is printed if an error occurs during the print job. The error code or "STOP" is also printed next to "NG."
Appendix
16
Reports
16-3
Device Information Delivery Destination List
The Device Information Delivery Destination List contains information about registered delivery destinations. You can print this
list from Register Destinations under Transmitting Settings in Device Information Delivery Settings in Management Settings (from
the Settings/Registration screen). (See e-Manual > Security.)
■ DESTINATION
The IP addresses of the registered destination machines are printed.
■ DEST. RECEIVABLE DATA
The data receivable at the registered destinations is printed.
■ AUTO DELIVERY
"On" is printed if Auto Delivery Settings in Transmitting Settings in Device Information Delivery Settings in Management Settings (from the
Settings/Registration screen) are set for the registered destination. "Off" is printed if Auto Delivery Settings are not set for the registered
destination.
■ AUTO DELIVERY DATA
The data that is delivered automatically is printed if Auto Delivery Settings in Transmitting Settings in Device Information Delivery Settings in
Management Settings (from the Settings/Registration screen) are set for the destination.
Appendix
16
16-4
Reports
Device Information Communication Log Report
The Device Information Communication Log Report contains information about device information that has been delivered and
received. You can select to print the Device Information Communication Log Report manually or automatically.
You can also select to either print the Communication Log after the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100, or
specify to print it at a specified time. The send and receive logs can also be printed separately. (See e-Manual > Security.)
■ START TIME
Prints the date and time (in 24-hour notation) when device information communication started. (An asterisk (*) indicates that a report has
already been printed.)
■ END TIME
Prints the date and time (in 24-hour notation) when device information delivery/reception completed.
■ TYPE
Displays whether the device information was delivered or received.
■ TO/FROM
Prints the delivery destination if the device information was delivered.
Prints the delivery source if the device information was received.
■ DATA DETAILS
Prints the device information that was delivered/received.
■ RESULT
Prints "OK" if the communication was completed successfully, or "NG" (No Good) if there was a communication error.
If an error occurred during communication, the error code is also printed.
Appendix
16
Reports
16-5
Send Job List
You can view the list of send jobs and their statuses. The Send Job List can be printed from the Status Monitor/Cancel screen. (See
e-Manual > Status Monitor/Cancel.)
A list of fax, e-mail, I-fax, and file server transmissions is printed on the Send Job List.
■ SET TIME
The date and time that the send job was specified is printed in 24-hour notation. If SSO-H is set as the login service, the user name used for
login is printed below the set time. When the machine cannot specify the user (for example, when automatically forwarding), the user name is
not printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be transmitted is printed. The start time is printed only for send jobs that have
been set with the Delayed Send setting.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The address of the recipient is printed.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the recipient is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for sending, is printed.
■ MODE
The type and mode of transmission are printed.
Transmission type:
Send (TX)
Mode of transmission:
FTP, SMB, WebDAV, Mail Box (BOX), I-Fax (I-FAX), E-mail (MAIL), Fax (FAX)
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent is printed.
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit in the display are printed.
Appendix
16
16-6
Reports
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report
The Send TX Report is a printed report that informs you of whether a send job has been successfully delivered to its destination. A
Send TX Report can be set to print automatically after each job is sent, or only when there are transmission errors. (See e-Manual >
Settings/Registration.)
• A list of fax, e-mail, I-fax, file server, and Mail Box transmissions is printed on the Send TX Report. Even if [Report with TX Image] is set to 'On', the
contents of the sent document are not printed on the report if the document was sent using the Encrypted PDF mode.
• You can also print a Send TX Report with an image of the sent original attached to it. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for sending, is printed.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to transmit are printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent is printed.
■ SEND DOCUMENT NAME
The name given to the document when the send settings were specified is printed.
■ TX/RX INCOMPLETE
If the transmission has been interrupted, the name and address of the destination are printed.
■ TRANSACTION OK
If the transmission completed successfully, the name and address of the destination are printed.
■ ERROR
If a sending error occurs, the name and address of the destination are printed.
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit in the display are printed.
Appendix
16
Reports
16-7
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report
This report indicates items, such as the fax number of the party to which you sent documents, the result of communication, and
other information, to enable you to check whether the documents were sent correctly to the intended destination.
You can set whether to automatically print a Fax TX Report after sending documents. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
• This mode is available only if the FAX Board is installed.
• You can also print a Fax TX Report with an image of the sent original attached to it. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
■ REPORT NAME
When the document transmission is completed successfully, a Fax TX Report is printed. When a send error occurs, a Fax Error TX Report is
printed.
■ MESSAGE
A message describing the transmission result is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for sending, is printed.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the destination is printed, up to the first 48 digits.
■ PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed, if specified. The password is not printed to maintain security.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the remote party is printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to transmit are printed.
■ USAGE T
16
Appendix
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to send the document from start to finish is printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent is printed.
■ RESULT
If the documents were transmitted successfully, "OK" is printed.
If a sending error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.
If a sending error occurred, the error code or "STOP" is also printed next to "NG."
16-8
Reports
Fax Multi TX Report
This report is used to check whether documents were sent successfully to the intended destinations when a sequential broadcast
transmission was performed.
If a sequential broadcast transmission is performed when Fax TX Report is set to ‘On’, a Fax Multi TX Report is printed automatically.
(See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
• This mode is available only if the FAX Board is installed.
• You can also print a Fax Multi TX Report with an image of the sent original attached to it. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for sending, is printed.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent is printed.
■ TX/RX INCOMPLETE
If a transmission is incomplete, the fax number and the name of the destination are printed. If there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is
printed.
■ TRANSACTION OK
The fax number and the name of the destination of a completed transmission are printed. If there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is printed.
■ ERROR
If an error in transmission occurs, the fax number and the name of the destination are printed. If there is no applicable destination, "_ _ _" is
printed.
Appendix
16
Reports
16-9
Fax RX Report
This report is used to check if documents were received successfully by this machine.
You can set whether to automatically print a Fax RX Report. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
This mode is available only if the FAX Board is installed.
■ MESSAGE
A message describing the reception result is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for receiving, is printed.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the sender is printed, up to the first 48 digits.
■ PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed, if specified. The password is not printed to maintain security.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the sender is printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be received are printed.
■ USAGE T
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to receive the document from start to finish is printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were received is printed.
■ RESULT
If the documents were received successfully, "OK" is printed.
If a reception error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.
16
Appendix
If a reception error occurred, the error code or "STOP" is also printed next to "NG."
16-10
Reports
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
This report enables you to confirm that documents were received in a Confidential Fax Inbox.
You can set whether to automatically print a Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
This mode is available only if the FAX Board is installed.
■ INBOX NO./NAME
The number (00 to 49) and user assigned name of the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the documents were received is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for receiving, is printed.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The fax number of the sender is printed, up to the first 48 digits.
■ PSWD/SUBADDRESS
A subaddress is printed if specified. The password is not printed to maintain security.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the sender is printed.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be received are printed.
■ USAGE T
The time taken (in minutes and seconds) to receive the document from start to finish is printed.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were received is printed.
■ RESULT
If the documents were received successfully, "OK" is printed.
If a reception error occurred, "NG" (No Good) is printed.
If a reception error occurred, the error code or "STOP" is also printed next to "NG."
Appendix
16
Reports
16-11
Activity Report
This report is a list which enables you to check the results of all sending and receiving transactions. An Activity Report can be
printed either automatically or manually.
An Activity Report is automatically printed when either the number of communication results reaches 100, or a specified time is
reached. The send and receive logs can also be printed separately.
An Activity Report can be printed manually at any time from the Status Monitor/Cancel screen. (See e-Manual > Status Monitor/
Cancel.)
• A list of fax, e-mail, I-fax, file server, and Mail Box transmission logs is printed on the Activity Report.
• When the message <Check the printer. Call service representative.> is displayed to indicate that the Print function is unavailable, the machine
automatically prints an Activity Report after it recovers from the problem. The latest 100 communication results are printed on the report.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed according to Department ID.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be transmitted or received are printed. An asterisk (*) indicates a
job that has already been printed. If SSO-H is set as the login service, the user name used for login is printed below the start time. When the
machine cannot specify the user (for example, when automatically forwarding), the user name is not printed.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The address of the recipient is printed.
If the send job is sent to a file server (FTP, SMB, or WebDAV), the path name is printed on the second line.
If a subaddress is specified for sending a fax, the destination address is printed on the second line.
■ DESTINATION ID
The name of the recipient is printed.
■ JOB NO.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for sending or receiving, is printed. Numbers between
0001 and 4999 are for sending, while numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for receiving.
■ MODE
The type and mode of transmission are printed.
Appendix
16
Transmission type:
Send (TX), Receive (RX)
Mode of transmission:
FTP, SMB, WebDAV, Mail Box (BOX), I-Fax (I-FAX), E-mail (MAIL), Fax (FAX), G3, ECM
If the FAX Board is installed, Mail Box, FAX, G3, and ECM can be printed in the MODE column.
16-12
Reports
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent or received is printed.
■ RESULT
"OK," "NG," or "- -," and the transmission time are printed.
If the documents have been received successfully by the recipient, "OK" is printed.
If a sending error occurs, "NG" (No Good) is printed, and the error code is printed on the second line.
When sending is successful, but it is not confirmed whether the e-mail message or I-fax, or the file that you sent was actually delivered, "--" is
printed.
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit in the display are printed.
Fax Activity Report
The Fax Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs. A Fax Activity Report can be printed either
automatically or manually.
A Fax Activity Report is automatically printed when either the number of communication results reaches 40, or a specified time is
reached. You can set whether to automatically print an Activity Report. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
• This mode is available only if the FAX Board is installed.
• When the message <Check the printer. Call service representative.> is displayed to indicate that the Print function is unavailable, the machine
automatically prints a Fax Activity Report after it recovers from the problem. The latest 40 communication results are printed on the report.
■ DEPT. ID
If Department ID Management is set, the Department ID is printed. Transmission logs are listed according to the Department ID.
■ ST. TIME (Start Time)
The date and time (in 24-hour notation) at which the document started to be transmitted or received are printed. An asterisk (*) indicates a
job that has already been printed. If SSO-H is set as the login service, the user name used for login is printed below the start time. When the
machine cannot specify the user (for example, when automatically forwarding), the user name is not printed.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
The name and fax number of the remote party are printed. If a subaddress or Sender Name has been specified, it is printed beneath the fax
number.
The four digit number, that is automatically assigned when the document is accepted for sending or receiving, is printed. Numbers between
0001 and 4999 are for sending, while numbers between 5001 and 9999 are for receiving.
■ MODE
The communicated contents and the Communication mode are printed.
Sending:
Receiving:
Communication mode:
TX, Sequential Broadcast TX, Delayed Sequential Broadcast, Transfer TX, Direct Sending
Manual RX, Automatic RX, Confidential Fax Inbox RX, Memory RX, Transfer RX
G3/ECM
Line Type (displayed only when multiple lines are used): 1, 2, 3, 4
Reports
16-13
Appendix
16
■ NO.
■ PGS.
The number of pages that were sent or received is printed.
■ RESULT
"OK" or "NG" and the transmission time are printed.
If the documents have been successfully sent to the recipient, "OK" is printed.
If a sending error occurred, the error code or "STOP" is also printed next to "NG."
Forwarding Conditions List
You can print the contents of the forwarding settings that have been specified. Manually print the Forwarding Conditions List
whenever necessary. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
Registered LDAP Server List
You can print the registered LDAP server settings. Manually print the Registered LDAP Server List whenever necessary. (See eManual > Settings/Registration.)
Address Book List
You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons). Manually print the list of the
selected Address Book whenever necessary. (See e-Manual > Settings/Registration.)
A list of fax, e-mail, I-fax, file server, and group destinations is printed on the Address Book List.
■ DESTINATION NAME
The name of the specified destination is printed.
When printing the contents of a one-touch button, the number of the one-touch button is printed on the first line.
■ CLASS
The specified destination's class (transmission mode) is printed.
■ DESTINATION ADDRESS
• If the Class is "FTP," "SMB," or "WebDAV" (file server):
16
Appendix
The host name is printed on the first line, and the folder path on the second line.
• If the Class is "BOX":
• If the Class is "I-FAX" or "MAIL":
The number of the Mail Box is printed.
The I-fax address or e-mail address is printed.
• If the Class is "FAX":
The fax number is printed on the first line, and the subaddress on the second line, if it is specified.
• If the Class is "GROUP":
The destinations stored in the group address are printed on the second line and continue down in a list. If a file server is stored in the group
address, no additional information is printed on the second line.
16-14
Reports
Store Log Report
You can print a log of store locations of the files. A Store Log Report can be printed manually at any time from the Status Monitor/
Cancel screen. (See e-Manual > Status Monitor/Cancel.)
■ Stored At
Prints the date and time (in 24-hour notation) of when the storing of a file was completed. (An asterisk (*) indicates a job that has been printed
on the Store Log Report before.)
■ Job No.
Prints the four digit number which is automatically assigned when a file is stored.
■ User
Prints the name of the user who stored the file.
■ Stored To
The name and path for the store location of the file are printed.
■ Protocol
The type of store location is printed.
There are three types of store location. The store location that meets the following condition is printed.
- Memory Media: If a file is stored in a removable media such as USB memory from "Scan and Store."
- Local: If a file is stored in the Advanced Box of this machine from "Scan and Store."
- Network: If a file is stored in the Advanced Box of another machine from "Scan and Store."
■ Result
"OK" is printed when storing is completed successfully.
"NG" is printed if an error occurred during storing.
For NG (No Good), the error code or "STOP" is printed next to "NG."
If a field exceeds its display capacity, only those characters that fit in the display are printed.
User’s Data List
The following types of user data list are available.
- Send/Receive: Prints all of the registered information related to send and receive jobs in Settings/Registration. For instructions on printing the
user data list, see e-Manual > Settings/Registration.
- Fax: Prints all of the registered information related to fax in Settings/Registration. For instructions on printing the user data list, see e-Manual
> Settings/Registration.
- Network: Prints all of the registered information related to network in Settings/Registration. For instructions on printing the user data list, see
e-Manual > Network.
Reports
16-15
Appendix
16
Prints the registration information for Settings/Registration. Manually print the User's Data List whenever necessary. (See eManual > Settings/Registration.)
System Information
■ MEAP Contents
Prints the version of the MEAP contents.
■ MEAP Specifications
Prints the version compatible with MEAP.
■ MEAP Function IDs
Prints the ID compatible with MEAP.
■ Application Name
Prints the name of the application.
■ Application ID/System Application Name
Prints the system application's file name or the Application ID of a standard application.
■ Application Version
Prints the application's version number.
■ Status
Prints the status of the application.
■ Installed on
Prints the date and time the application was installed.
■ Vendor
Prints the name of the application vendor.
■ License Status
Prints the license status.
Appendix
16
16-16
Reports
■ License Expires After
Prints the expiration date of the license.
■ License Upper Limit
Prints the upper license limit for each counter.
■ Counter Value
Prints the current value for each counter.
■ Free Register
Prints the current value for each register.
■ Maximum Memory Usage
Prints the maximum amount of memory that can be used by each application. The Maximum Memory Usage number is printed in kilobytes
(KB).
■ Registered Service
Prints the service registered on the MEAP framework from the application. The Registered Service is printed only if there is data that
corresponds to it.
The printed items are subject to change, as we are constantly improving our products.
Appendix
16
Reports
16-17
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Main Unit
Item
Specification
Name
Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030
Type
Desktop
Color Supported
Full Color
Paper Drawers:
Weight:
14 lb bond to 110 lb index (52 to 209 g/m2)
Type:
Thin, Plain, Recycled, Color, Pre-Punched, Bond, Heavy 1(29 lb bond to 60 lb cover (106 to 163 g/m2)), Heavy 2
(61 lb cover to 110 lb index (164 to 209 g/m2)), Transparency, Tab, and Envelopes
Available Paper
Multi-Purpose Tray:
Weight:
14 lb bond to 140 lb index (52 to 256 g/m2)
Type:
Thin, Plain, Recycled, Color, Pre-Punched, Bond, Heavy 1(29 lb bond to 60 lb cover (106 to 163 g/m2)), Heavy 2
(61 lb cover to 110 lb index (164 to 209 g/m2)), Heavy 3 (80 lb cover to 140 lb index (210 to 256 g/m2)), Tracing,
Coated, Labels, Transparency, Tab, and Envelopes
Paper Drawer1:
LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXEC, and Custom size (5 1/2” x 7 1/8” to 12” x 15 3/8” (139.7 mm x 182 mm to 304.8
mm x 390 mm))
Paper Sizes
Paper Drawer2:
12”x18”, 11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXEC, Custom size (5 1/2” x 7 1/8” to 12” x 18” (139.7 mm x 182 mm to
304.8 mm x 457.2 mm)) and Envelopes
Multi-Purpose Tray:
12 5/8”x17 11/16”, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC, Custom size (3 7/8” x 5 1/2” to 12 5/8” x
18” (99 mm x 139.7 mm to 320 mm x 457.2 mm)), and Envelopes
After Powering ON:
38 seconds
Appendix
16
Warm-Up Time
Returning from the Sleep mode:
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045: 18 seconds
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/C5030: 15 seconds
Activation time may vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being
used.
Full Color:
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045: 6.5 seconds
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/C5030: 8.9 seconds
First Copy Time
16-18
Specifications
Black-and-White:
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045: 4.0 seconds
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/C5030: 5.5 seconds
Item
Specification
Direct (sheet/minute)
Copy Speed
(Except when paper is fed
from the Multi-Purpose Tray)
12” x 18”
11” x 17”
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
EXEC
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
C5051
20
26
26
51
26
10
13
Resolution for Writing
1,200 x 1,200 dpi
Margin
Top: 1/8” (4.0 mm)
Left and Right: 1/8” (2.5 mm)
Bottom: 1/8” (2.5 mm)
Paper Feeding System/
Capacity
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
C5045
20
26
26
45
26
10
13
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
C5035
15
18
18
35
18
10
13
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
C5030
15
18
18
30
18
10
13
Paper Drawers:
550 sheets x 2 cassettes (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Multi-Purpose Tray:
100 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Power Source
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045: 120V AC, 60Hz, 20A
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/C5030: 120V AC, 60Hz, 15A
Maximum Power
Consumption
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045: 1.8 kW
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/C5030: 1.3 kW
Only the Main Unit:
31 1/2” x24 3/8” x 29” (801 mm x 620 mm x 735 mm)
With the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1:
38 5/8” x 24 3/8” x 29 7/8” (982 mm x 620 mm x 760 mm)
Dimensions (H x W x D)
With the Color Image Reader Unit-B1:
37” x 24 3/8” x 29” (938 mm x 620 mm x 735 mm)
With the Color Image Reader Unit-B2:
32 1/2” x 24 3/8” x 29” (826 mm x 620 mm x 735 mm)
Only the Main Unit:
Approximately 293 lb (133 kg)
With the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1:
Approximately 379 lb (172 kg)
16
With the Color Image Reader Unit-B1:
Approximately 342 lb (155 kg)
Appendix
Weight
With the Color Image Reader Unit-B2:
Approximately 326 lb (148 kg)
Installation Space (W x D)
33 1/2” x 29” (850 mm x 735 mm)
(when the multi-purpose tray is extended)
Specifications
16-19
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1
Item
Specification
Original Feeding Mechanism
Automatic Document Feeder
Size and Weight of Originals
11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or STMTR
1-sided scanning: 11 to 32 lb bond (42 to 128 g/m2)
2-sided scanning: 13 to 32 lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2)
Original Tray Capacity
150 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Original Scanning Speed
Copying:
1-sided scanning: 70 sheets/minute (LTR in Black-and-White at 600 dpi)
2-sided scanning: 35 sheets/minute (LTR in Black-and-White at 600 dpi)
1-sided scanning: 51 sheets/minute (LTR in Full Color at 600 dpi)
2-sided scanning: 25.5 sheets/minute (LTR in Full Color at 600 dpi)
Scanning:
1-sided scanning: 70 sheets/minute (LTR in Black-and-White/Full Color at 300 dpi)
2-sided scanning: 50 sheets/minute (LTR in Black-and-White/Full Color at 300 dpi)
Resolution for Reading
600 x 600 dpi
Number of Tones
256
Acceptable Originals
Sheet, book, three dimentional objects (up to 4.4 lb (2 kg))
Regular paper size:
Same Ratio
Direct
Reduction
1:0.78 (LGL → LTR)
1:0.73 (11” x 17” → LGL, 11” x 15” → LTR)
1:0.64 (11” x 17” → LTR)
1:0.50 (11” x 17” → STMT)
1:0.25
Magnification
Enlargement
1:1.21 (LGL → 11” x 17”)
1:1.29 (LTR → 11” x 17”)
1:2.00 (STMT → 11” x 17”)
1:4.00
Copy Ratio:
Appendix
16
16-20
25 to 400 % (in 1% increments)
Multiple Copies
1 to 999 sheets
Power Source/Consumption
Feeder: From the main unit/133 W
Scanner: From the main unit/17 W
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Feeder: 7 1/8” x 24 3/8” x 23 3/4” (181 mm x 618 mm x 603 mm)
Scanner (Platen Glass): 2 7/8” x 24 3/8” x 22 1/4” (72 mm x 620 mm x 564 mm)
Weight
Feeder: Approximately 59.1 lb (26.8 kg)
Scanner: Approximately 26.5 lb (12 kg)
Specifications
Color Image Reader Unit-B1
Item
Specification
Original Feeding Mechanism
Automatic Document Feeder
Size and Weight of Originals
11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, or STMTR
1-sided scanning: 11 to 32 lb bond (42 to 128 g/m2)
2-sided scanning: 13 to 32 lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2)
Original Tray Capacity
100 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Copying:
1-sided scanning: 46 sheets/minute (LTR in Black-and-White/Full Color at 600 dpi)
Original Scanning Speed
Scanning:
1-sided scanning: 46 sheets/minute (LTR in Black-and-White/Full Color at 300 dpi)
Resolution for Reading
600 x 600 dpi
Number of Tones
256
Acceptable Originals
Sheet, book, three dimentional objects (up to 4.4 lb (2 kg))
Regular paper size:
Same Ratio
Direct
Reduction
1:0.78 (LGL → LTR)
1:0.73 (11” x 17” → LGL, 11” x 15” → LTR)
1:0.64 (11” x 17” → LTR)
1:0.50 (11” x 17” → STMT)
1:0.25
Magnification
Enlargement
1:1.21 (LGL → 11” x 17”)
1:1.29 (LTR → 11” x 17”)
1:2.00 (STMT → 11” x 17”)
1:4.00
25 to 400 % (in 1% increments)
Multiple Copies
1 to 999 sheets
Power Source/Consumption
Feeder: From the main unit/45 W
Scanner: From the main unit/17 W
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Feeder: 5 3/8” x 24 3/8” x 21 1/8” (137 mm x 620 mm x 537 mm)
Scanner (Platen Glass): 2 7/8” x 24 3/8” x 22 1/4” (72 mm x 620 mm x 564 mm)
Weight
Feeder: Approximately 19.2 lb (8.7 kg)
Scanner: Approximately 26.5 lb (12 kg)
16
Appendix
Copy Ratio:
Specifications
16-21
Color Image Reader Unit-B2
Item
Specification
Resolution for Reading
600 x 600 dpi
Number of Tones
256
Acceptable Originals
Sheet, book, three dimentional objects (up to 4.4 lb (2 kg))
Regular paper size:
Same Ratio
Direct
Reduction
1:0.78 (LGL → LTR)
1:0.73 (11” x 17” → LGL, 11” x 15” → LTR)
1:0.64 (11” x 17” → LTR)
1:0.50 (11” x 17” → STMT)
1:0.25
Magnification
Enlargement
1:1.21 (LGL → 11” x 17”)
1:1.29 (LTR → 11” x 17”)
1:2.00 (STMT → 11” x 17”)
1:4.00
Copy Ratio:
25 to 400 % (in 1% increments)
Multiple Copies
1 to 999 sheets
Power Source/Consumption
From the main unit/40 W
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Platen Cover: 1” x 22 1/8” x 19 3/8” (25 mm x 561 mm x 493 mm)
Scanner (Platen Glass): 2 7/8” x 24 3/8” x 22 1/4” (72 mm x 620 mm x 564 mm)
Weight
Platen Cover: Approximately 3.7 lb (1.7 kg)
Scanner: Approximately 26.5 lb (12 kg)
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1
Item
16
Specification
Paper Sizes
12"x18", 11"x17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXEC, and Custom size (5 1/2" x 7 3/16" to 12" x 18" (139.7 mm x 182
mm to 304.8 mm x 457.2 mm))
Paper Drawers Capacity
550 sheets x 2 cassettes (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Appendix
Power Source/Maximum Power From the main unit/Approximately 30W
Consumption
9 7/8" x 24 3/8" x 27 5/8" (251 mm x 620 mm x 700 mm)
Dimensions (H x W x D)
Weight
16-22
Specifications
Approximately 60.6 lb (27.5 kg)
Paper Deck Unit-B1
Item
Specification
Paper Size
LTR
Paper Deck Capacity
2,700 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Power Source/Consumption
From the main unit/Approximately 45 W
Dimensions (H x W x D)
18 5/8" x 14 5/8" x 23 3/4" (473 mm x 372 mm x 603 mm)
Weight
Approximately 81.6 lb (37 kg)
Installation Space Including
the Main Unit (W x D)
39 1/8" x 29" (992 mm x 735 mm)
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1
Item
Specifications
Acceptable Envelopes
COM10 No.10, Monarch, DL, ISO-B5, ISO-C5
Capacity
50 sheets (or 30 mm in height)
Feeding Speed
10 cpm
Dimensions (H x W x D)
3 1/4" x 17 1/4" x 12 1/8" (81 mm x 439 mm x 307 mm)
Weight
Approximately 2.6 lb (1.2 kg)
Inner Finisher-A1
Item
Specification
Size:
12 5/8”x17 11/16”, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC, Custom size (3 7/8” x 5 9/16” to 12 5/8”
x 18” (99 mm x 139.7 mm to 320 mm x 457.2 mm)), and Envelopes
Weight:
14 lb bond to 140 lb index (52 to 256 g/m2)
Type:
Thin, Plain, Recycled, Color, Pre-Punched, Bond, Heavy 1(29 lb bond to 60 lb cover (106 to 163 g/m2)), Heavy
2 (61 lb cover to 110 lb index (164 to 209 g/m2)), Heavy 3 (80 lb cover to 140 lb index (210 to 256 g/m2)),
Tracing, Coated, Labels, Transparency, and Envelopes
Specifications
16-23
16
Appendix
Paper Size/Weight/Type
Item
Specification
No Collating, Collate, Group mode:
12”x18”, 11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC:
500 sheets (or 2 1/2” (62.5 mm) in height)
(when the Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 is not attached)
200 sheets (or 1” (25 mm) in height)
(when the Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 is attached)
Collate (Shift), Group (Shift) mode:
12”x18”,11”x17”, LGL:
200 sheets (or 1” (25 mm) in height)
Capacity Per Tray
(Standard Tray)
LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC:
500 sheets (or 2 1/2” (62.5 mm) in height)
(when the Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 is not attached)
200 sheets (or 1” (25 mm) in height)
(when the Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 is attached)
Staple mode:
11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC:
30 sets (or 2 1/2” (62.5 mm) in height)
No Collating, Collate, Group mode with different paper sizes:
200 sheets (or 1” (25 mm) in height)
Staple mode with different paper sizes:
30 sets (or 1” (25 mm) in height)
No Collating, Collate, Group mode:
12”x18”,11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC:
100 sheets (or 1/2” (12.5 mm) in height)
Staple mode:
Capacity Per Tray
(Additional Tray)
11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC:
3/8” (8.1 mm) in height
No Collating, Collate, Group mode with different paper sizes:
100 sheets (or 1/2” (12.5 mm) in height)
Staple mode with different paper sizes:
3/8” (8.1 mm) in height
16
Appendix
LTR:
50 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
30 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Corner Staple/Double Staple mode:
11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR
Max. Stapling Capacity/
Available Staple Size
LTR:
50 sheets (14 to 21 lb bond (52 to 81 g/m2))
30 sheets (22 to 28 lb bond (82 to 105 g/m2))
2 sheets (29 lb bond to 140 lb index (106 to 256 g/m2))
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
30 sheets (14 to 21 lb bond (52 to 81 g/m2))
20 sheets (22 to 28 lb bond (82 to 105 g/m2))
2 sheets (29 lb bond to 140 lb index (106 to 256 g/m2))
16-24
Specifications
Item
Specification
Power Source/Maximum Power From the main unit/Approximately 50 W
Consumption
9 1/4” x 34 1/8” x 21 1/4” (234 mm x 865 mm x 540 mm)
Dimensions (H x W x D)
(when the auxiliary tray is extended)
Weight
Approximately 28.7 lb (13 kg) (when the optional Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 is attached)
Installation Space Including
the Main Unit (W x D)
43 1/8” x 29” (1,095 mm x 735 mm)
(when the multi-purpose tray and the auxiliary tray are extended)
Staple Finisher-C1
Item
Specification
Size:
12 5/8”x17 11/16”, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT *, STMTR, EXEC, and Envelopes
* STMT cannot be used when the External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1 is attached.
Paper Size/Weight/Type
Weight:
14 lb bond to 140 lb index (52 to 256 g/m2)
Type:
Thin, Plain, Recycled, Color, Pre-Punched, Bond, Heavy 1(29 lb bond to 60 lb cover (106 to 163 g/m2)), Heavy
2 (61 lb cover to 110 lb index (164 to 209 g/m2)), Heavy 3 (80 lb cover to 140 lb index (210 to 256 g/m2)),
Tracing, Coated, Labels, Transparency, and Envelopes
No Collating, Collate, Group mode
LTR, STMTR, EXEC:
1,300 sheets (or 7 3/8” (188 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Collate (Shift), Group (Shift) mode
LTR, STMTR, EXEC:
1,300 sheets (or 7 3/8” (188 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Staple mode
LTR, EXEC:
1,300 sheets/30 sets (or 7 3/8” (188 mm) in height)
16
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets/30 sets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Appendix
Capacity Per Tray (Upper
Output Tray)
No Collating, Collate, Group mode with different paper sizes:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Staple mode with different paper sizes:
650 sheets/30 sets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Specifications
16-25
Item
Specification
No Collating, Collate, Group mode
LTR, STMTR, EXEC:
1,700 sheets (or 9 5/8” (243 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Collate (Shift), Group (Shift) mode
LTR, STMTR, EXEC:
1,700 sheets (or 9 5/8” (243 mm) in height)
Capacity Per Tray (Lower
Output Tray)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Staple mode
LTR, EXEC:
1,700 sheets/30 sets (or 9 5/8” (243 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets/30 sets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
No Collating, Collate, Group mode with different paper sizes:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Staple mode with different paper sizes:
650 sheets/30 sets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
LTR, EXEC:
50 sheets (14 to 21 lb bond(52 to 81 g/m2))
30 sheets (22 to 28 lb bond(82 to 105 g/m2))
2 sheets (29 lb bond to 140 lb index(106 to 256 g/m2))
Max. Stapling Capacity/
Available Staple Size
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
30 sheets (14 to 21 lb bond(52 to 81 g/m2))
20 sheets (22 to 28 lb bond(82 to 105 g/m2))
2 sheets (29 lb bond to 140 lb index(106 to 256 g/m2))
Corner Staple/Double Staple mode:
11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC
Power Source/Maximum Power From the main unit/Approximately 117 W
Consumption
Appendix
16
Dimensions (H x W x D)
43 1/4” x 26 5/8” x 25 1/2” (1,097 mm x 677 mm x 646 mm)
(when the auxiliary tray is extended)
Weight
Approximately 101 lb (46 kg)
Installation Space Including
the Main Unit (W x D)
16-26
Specifications
60 1/8” x 29” (1,527 mm x 735 mm)
(when the multi-purpose tray and the auxiliary tray are extended)
64 3/8” x 29” (1,634 mm x 735 mm)
(when the optional External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1 is attached, the multi-purpose tray and the auxiliary tray are
extended)
Booklet Finisher-C1
Item
Specification
Size:
12 5/8”x17 11/16”, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT *, STMTR, EXEC, and Envelopes
* STMT cannot be used when the External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1 is attached.
Paper Size/Weight/Type
Weight:
14 lb bond to 140 lb index (52 to 256 g/m2)
Type:
Thin, Plain, Recycled, Color, Pre-Punched, Bond, Heavy 1(29 lb bond to 60 lb cover (106 to 163 g/m2)), Heavy
2 (61 lb cover to 110 lb index (164 to 209 g/m2)), Heavy 3 (80 lb cover to 140 lb index (210 to 256 g/m2)),
Tracing, Coated, Labels, Transparency, and Envelopes
No Collating, Collate, Group mode
LTR, STMTR, EXEC:
1,300 sheets (or 7 3/8” (188 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Collate (Shift), Group (Shift) mode
LTR, STMTR, EXEC:
1,300 sheets (or 7 3/8” (188 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Staple mode
LTR, EXEC:
1,300 sheets/30 sets (or 7 3/8” (188 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets/30 sets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
No Collating, Collate, Group mode with different paper sizes:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Staple mode with different paper sizes:
650 sheets/30 sets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
16
Appendix
Capacity Per Tray (Upper
Output Tray)
Specifications
16-27
Item
Specification
No Collating, Collate, Group mode
LTR, STMTR, EXEC:
1,700 sheets (or 9 5/8” (243 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Collate (Shift), Group (Shift) mode
LTR, STMTR, EXEC:
1,700 sheets (or 9 5/8” (243 mm) in height)
Capacity Per Tray (Lower
Output Tray)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Staple mode
LTR, EXEC:
1,700 sheets/30 sets (or 9 5/8” (243 mm) in height)
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
650 sheets/30 sets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
No Collating, Collate, Group mode with different paper sizes:
650 sheets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
Staple mode with different paper sizes:
650 sheets/30 sets (or 3 3/4” (96 mm) in height)
LTR, EXEC:
50 sheets (14 to 21 lb bond(52 to 81 g/m2))
30 sheets (22 to 28 lb bond(82 to 105 g/m2))
2 sheets (29 lb bond to 140 lb index(106 to 256 g/m2))
Max. Stapling Capacity/
Available Staple Size
11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
30 sheets (14 to 21 lb bond(52 to 81 g/m2))
20 sheets (22 to 28 lb bond(82 to 105 g/m2))
2 sheets (29 lb bond to 140 lb index(106 to 256 g/m2))
Corner Staple/Double Staple mode:
11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, EXEC
Max. Saddle Stitch Capacity/
Available Saddle Stitch Size
12” x 18”, 11” x 17”, LGL, LTRR:
16 sheets (14 to 20 lb bond (52 to 81 g/m2))
10 sheets (22 to 28 lb bond (82 to 105 g/m2))
Power Source/Maximum Power From the main unit/Approximately 117 W
Consumption
Appendix
16
Dimensions (H x W x D)
43 1/4” x 31 1/8” x 25 1/2” (1,097 mm x 789 mm x 646 mm)
(when the auxiliary tray is extended)
Weight
Approximately 165 lb (75 kg)
64 1/2” x 29” (1,639 mm x 735 mm)
(when the multi-purpose tray and the auxiliary tray are extended)
Installation Space Including
the Main Unit (W x D)
16-28
Specifications
68 3/4” x 29” (1,746 mm x 735 mm)
(when the optional External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1 is attached, the multi-purpose tray and the auxiliary tray are
extended)
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1
Item
Specifications
Size:
11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR
Paper Size/Weight/Type
Weight:
14 lb bond to 140 lb index (52 to 256 g/m2)
Type:
Thin, Plain, Recycled, Color, Heavy 1(29 lb bond to 60 lb cover (106 to 163 g/m2)), Heavy 2 (61 lb cover to 110
lb index (164 to 209 g/m2)), Heavy 3 (80 lb cover to 140 lb index (210 to 256 g/m2))
Punch Hole Quantity, Hole
Diameter
Two or three holes: 3/8” (8 mm)
Two holes: 2 3/4” (70 mm)
Distance between Punch Holes Three holes: 4 1/4” (108 mm)
Paper Size in Which Holes Can 11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR
be Punched
Punch Waste Tray Capacity
Approximately 2,500 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Power Source
From the main unit
Dimensions (H x W x D)
35 3/4” x 4 1/4” x 24 1/2” (908 mm x 107 mm x 623 mm)
Weight
Approximately 15.9 lb (7.2 kg)
Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1
Specifications
Paper Size/Weight/Type
See specification of "Paper Size/Weight/Type" in Inner Finisher-A1.
Capacity Per Tray
See specification of "Capacity Per Tray (Additional Tray)" in Inner Finisher-A1.
Dimensions (H x W x D)
2 1/4" x 8 1/8" x 17 3/4" (57 mm x 207 mm x 450 mm)
Weight
Approximately 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
16
Appendix
Item
Specifications
16-29
Inner 2 Way Tray-F1
Item
Specifications
Size:
12 5/8”x17 11/16”, 12”x18”, 11”x17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR, EXEC, Custom size (3 7/8” x 5 1/2” to 12 5/8”
x 18” (99 mm x 139.7 mm to 320 mm x 457.2 mm)), and Envelopes
Paper Size/Weight/Type
Weight:
14 lb bond to 140 lb index (52 to 256 g/m2)
Type:
Thin, Plain, Recycled, Color, Pre-Punched, Bond, Heavy 1(29 lb bond to 60 lb cover (106 to 163 g/m2)), Heavy
2 (61 lb cover to 110 lb index (164 to 209 g/m2)), Heavy 3 (80 lb cover to 140 lb index (210 to 256 g/m2)),
Tracing, Coated, Labels, Transparency, and Envelopes
Capacity
Tray A: 250 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Tray B: 100 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Dimensions (H x W x D)
3” x 16 3/4” x 16” (76 mm x 426 mm x 407 mm)
Weight
Approximately 1.3 lb (574 g)
Installation Space Including
the Main Unit (W x D)
33 1/2” x 29” (850 mm x 735 mm) (when the multi-purpose tray is extended)
Copy Tray-J1
Item
Specification
Size:
11” x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR, and EXEC
Paper Size/Weight/Type
Weight:
14 lb bond to 110 lb index (52 to 209 g/m2)
Type:
Thin, Plain, Recycled, Color, Pre-Punched, Bond, Heavy 1(29 lb bond to 60 lb cover (106 to 163 g/m2)), Heavy
2 (61 lb cover to 110 lb index (164 to 209 g/m2)), and Tab
100 sheets (20 lb bond (80 g/m2))
Dimensions (H x W x D)
5 5/8” x 14 3/8” x 14 3/4” (144 mm x 365 mm x 373 mm)(When the auxiliary tray is extended)
Weight
Approximately 1 lb (438 g)
Installation Space Including
the Main Unit (W x D)
38 1/8” x 29” (967 mm x 735 mm)(When the auxiliary tray is extended)
Appendix
16
Capacity
16-30
Specifications
Card Reader-C1
Item
Specifications
Available Cards
Optical
Card Readout Method
Optical readout
Magnetic Card Reading Direction
Face up
Store/Replay
Replay
Power Source
From the main unit
Dimensions (H x W x D)
1 1/4" x 3 1/2" x 4" (32 mm x 88 mm x 100 mm)
Weight
Approximately 10.4 oz (295 g)
Super G3 FAX Board
Specifications remain the same even when the Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 3rd/4th Line FAX Board is installed.
Item
Specifications
Telephone Line Used
Public Switched Telephone Network
Scan line Density
(Scan, Transmission)
Standard:
Fine:
Super-Fine:
Ultra-Fine:
Transmission Speed
Super G3: 33.6 kbps, G3: 14.4 kbps
Compression Method
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Transmission Type
Super G3, G3
Sending Original Sizes
11”x 17” to STMT
Receiving Paper Sizes
11”x 17” to STMT
Transmission Times
ECM-MMR:
G3MR method:
G3MH method:
JBIG:
Auto Dial Function
Address Book: 1,800 destinations
(including destinations stored in one-touch buttons)
Image Memory
Approximately 6,000 pages
8 pels*2/mm x 3.85 line/mm
8 pels*2/mm x 7.7 line/mm
8 pels*2/mm x 15.4 line/mm
16 pels*2/mm x 15.4 line/mm
Approximately 3.2 seconds
Approximately 13 seconds
Approximately 13 seconds
Approximately 2.6 seconds
16
*1 When using an IP telephone service, facsimile communication may not be performed normally via an IP telephone line. It is recommended to use facsimile communication via a general
telephone (Public Switched Telephone Network) line.
*2 Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).
Specifications
16-31
Appendix
*1
Send Function
■ Scan Features
Item
Communication Protocol
Data Format
TIFF, JPEG, PDF, XPS, OOXML
Resolution
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi,
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
System Environment
Windows 2000 (SP1 or later), Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Mac OS X,
Red Hat Linux 7.2, Solaris Version 2.6 or later
Interface
1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color Mode
Automatic-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale),
Automatic-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White), Full Color, Grayscale, Black-and-White
Original Type
Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Others
Preview, Browse Windows (SMB) File Server
Optional PDF/XPS/OOXML
Functions
Compact*2, Trace and Smooth*1, Encryption*1, OCR, Divice Signature*2, User Signature*2, Optimization for Web*1,
PDF/A*1, Reader Extensions*1, Policy Applied*1
*1 PDF only.
*2 PDF/XPS only.
Appendix
16
16-32
Specifications
FTP (TCP/IP), SMB (TCP/IP), WebDAV
Specifications
■ E-mail and I-Fax Features
Item
Specifications
Communication Protocol
SMTP, POP3
I-Fax Communication Mode
Simple, Full
For Sending E-mail
100 x 100 dpi, 150 x 150 dpi,
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi,
200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi,
400 x 400 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi
Black-and-White
200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi,
200 x 400 dpi*, 300 x 300 dpi*,
400 x 400 dpi*, 600 x 600 dpi*
Resolution
For Sending I-Fax
Color
100 x 100 dpi*, 200 x 200 dpi*
300 x 300 dpi*, 400 x 400 dpi*
600 x 600 dpi*
* Available after setting RX conditions of the destination
E-mail
Format
TIFF, JPEG, PDF, XPS, OOXML
Black-and-White
TIFF (MH, MR*, MMR*)
I-Fax
Color
TIFF (Profile-C)*
* Available after setting RX conditions of the destination
Original Size
E-mail
11”x 17”, LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT, STMTR
I-Fax
11”x 17”, LGL*, LTR, LTRR, STMT*, STMTR*
* Sent as LTR
Server Software
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 (SP1 or later), Sendmail 8.93, Lotus Domino R 4.6 or later
Other
Searches a destination via the LDAP Server, Preview
Optional PDF/XPS Functions
(E-mail only)
Compact*2, Trace and Smooth*1, Encryption*1, OCR, Divice Signature*2, User Signature*2, Optimization for Web*1,
PDF/A*1, Reader Extensions*1, Policy Applied*1
*1 PDF only.
*2 PDF/XPS only.
Appendix
16
Specifications
16-33
Network Environment
Hardware Specifications
Network Interface
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T (RJ-45)
Software Specifications
Protocol Supported
TCP/IP
Frame type:
Print applications:
Ethernet II
LPD/Raw/IPP/IPPS/FTP/WSD
IPX/SPX
Frame type:
Ethernet II/Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/
Ethernet SNAP/Auto Detect
Bindery PServer/NDS PServer/RPrinter/
NPrinter
Print applications:
NetBIOS*1
Frame type:
Print application:
Ethernet II
SMB
AppleTalk
Frame type:
Print application:
Ethernet SNAP
PAP (Printer Access Protocol)
*1 IPv6 is not supported.
Printer Settings
Software Specifications
Command Language
PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3
Resident Fonts
PCL:
PS:
93 Scalable fonts, 2 OCR fonts, and 10 Bitmap fonts
138 Scalable fonts
PCL5e, PCL6:
Reduced to 1/6”(4.23 mm) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper.
Printable Area
PostScript 3:
Reduced to 1/6”(4 mm) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper.
Appendix
16
16-34
Specifications
Provide Adequate Installation Space
■ Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted operation.
The Color Image Reader Unit-B2 is attached.
4" (100 mm) or more
45 5/8" (1,159 mm)
42 1/8" (1,071mm)
The Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1, Inner Finisher-A1, and
Paper Deck Unit-B1 are attached.
4" (100 mm) or more
48" (1,219 mm)
58 1/2" (1,487 mm)
50 5/8" (1,284 mm)
The Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1, External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1,
Booklet Finisher-C1, Buffer Pass Unit-G1, and Paper Deck Unit-B1 are
attached.
4" (100 mm) or more
Appendix
16
48" (1,219 mm)
81 1/4" (2,062 mm)
4 5/8" (118 mm)
85 7/8" (2,180 mm)
Specifications
16-35
CANON imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045/C5035/C5030 SERIES LIMITED
WARRANTY
Appendix
16
16-36
Specifications
TERMS OF imageWARE REMOTE SERVICE
Appendix
16
Specifications
16-37
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various
Functions
Number of Enterable Characters
Settings/Registration
Function Settings
Common
Print Settings
24 characters maximum
Register Characters
for Page No./
Watermark
Characters
32 characters maximum
Copy Set Numbering Characters
Option Settings
16 characters maximum
Forced Secure
Watermark/Doc.
Scan Lock
Characters
32 characters maximum
Printer Driver
Watermark/Doc.
Scan Lock
Characters
32 characters maximum
Register/Edit
Register Name
Favorite Settings
10 characters maximum
Send
Common
Settings
Register/Edit Favorite Register Name
Settings
(10 characters maximum)x2
E-mail/I-Fax
Settings
Register Unit Name
24 characters maximum
Default Subject
40 characters maximum
Fax Settings
Register Sender Name (TTI)
24 characters maximum
Common
Settings
16
Appendix
Form Name
Copy
Receive/Forward
Store/Use File
16-38
Register Form
Common
Settings
Set Line
Line n
Register Unit Name
24 characters maximum
Remote Fax TX
Settings
Server Address
IP Address or Host
Name
48 characters maximum
Forwarding Settings
Forwarding Condition Name
50 characters maximum
File Name
24 characters maximum
Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Set/Register
Confidential Fax
Inboxes
Register Inbox
Name
24 characters maximum
Scan and Store
Settings
Register/Edit
Favorite Settings
Register Name
10 characters maximum
Settings of Access
Stored File
Register/Edit
Favorite Settings
Register Name
10 characters maximum
Mail Box Settings Set/Register Mail
Boxes
Register Mail Box Name
24 characters maximum
Network Settings Network Place
Settings
Register Name
32 characters maximum
Folder Path
128 characters maximum
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions
Set Destination
Server Name
24 characters maximum
Server Address
48 characters maximum
Position to Start Search
128 characters maximum
Register Address List Name
Name
16 characters maximum
Acquire Remote Address Remote Address Book Server Address
Book
IP Address or Host Name
128 characters maximum
Address Book Settings
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
Fax Number
40 digits maximum
Subaddress
20 digits maximum
Password
20 digits maximum
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
E-mail Address
128 characters maximum
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
I-Fax Address
128 characters maximum
Standard Field 1
40 characters maximum
Standard Field 2
16 characters maximum
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
Host Name
128 characters maximum
Folder Path
255 characters maximum
User
FTP: 24 characters
maximum
SMB, WebDAV: 128
characters maximum
Password
SMB, FTP, WebDAV: 24
characters maximum
Name
24 characters maximum
One-touch Button Name*
12 characters maximum
Fax
E-mail
I-Fax
File
Group
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions
16
16-39
Appendix
Register LDAP Server
Management Settings
User Management
System Manager Information Settings
Device Management
Device Information Settings
System Manager
32 characters maximum
E-mail Address
64 characters maximum
Contact Information
32 characters maximum
Comment
32 characters maximum
Device Name
32 characters maximum
Location Information
32 characters maximum
*One-touch button name can be entered only when you are setting the one-touch buttons.
Capacity of Various Functions
Settings/Registration
Preferences
Timer/Energy Settings
Send
Receive/Forward
Store/Use File
Date/Time Settings
Fax Settings
Year, Month, day, hour
Function Settings
Register Sender Name Number of Names
(TTI)
Set Line
Line n
Common Settings Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Mail Box Settings Set/Register Mail
Boxes
99
User Telephone No.
20 digits maximum
Set/Register
Number of Inboxes
Confidential Fax
Inboxes
Memory RX Inbox PIN
50
Number of Mail Boxes
100
PIN
7 digits maximum
7 digits maximum
Set Destination
Appendix
16
Address Book PIN
7 digits maximum
Address Book Capacity
1600 destinations
One-touch Button Capacity
200 destinations
Management Settings
User Management System Manager Information Settings
Department ID Management
16-40
System Manager ID
7 digits maximum
System PIN Settings
7 digits maximum
Dept. ID
7 digits maximum
PIN
7 digits maximum
Page Limits
0-999999
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions
Copy
Copy
Favorite Settings
Number of Keys
9
Reserving Copy Jobs
Number of Jobs
20 jobs
Scan and Store
Scan and Store
Favorite Settings
Number of Keys
9
Access Stored Files
Access Stored Files
Favorite Settings
Number of Keys
9
Sending Documents
Number of Documents
32 documents maximum
Number of Pages
999 pages maximum
Number of Jobs
32 jobs
Reserving Print Jobs
Scan and Send
Scan and Send
Favorite Settings
Number of Keys
18
Send Jobs
Number of pages
999 pages maximum
Reserving Send Jobs
E-mail
I-Fax
File
Mail Box
120 jobs
Fax
Fax
Number of pages
999 pages maximum
Reserving Send Jobs
Fax
64 jobs
16
Appendix
Send Jobs
Number of Enterable Characters and Capacity of Various Functions
16-41
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted
Paper Output Chart
Please use this chart when printing on preprinted paper (i.e., paper with logos or letterheads).
If you want to copy on the back side of preprinted paper, place the side you want to copy on:
- face up when using a paper drawer
- face down when using the multi-purpose tray or the Paper Deck Unit-B1
● If You Want to Set Right Side Stapling:
Staple
Position
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Top
LTR
11"x17", LGL, LTRR
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Output
Example
LTR
11"x17", LGL, LTRR
Preprinted Paper
Orientation in
paper drawer
Preprinted side:
Face up
Orientation in multipurpose tray/paper deck
Preprinted side:
Face down
Orientation on
the platen glass
Original
Original side:
Face down
Staple position
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Bottom Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up
Staple position
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Either On or Off (Set to 'On'
when paper orientation in the
paper deck/multi-purpose tray/
paper drawer is vertical.)
Appendix
16
Auto Orientation Setting
16-42
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Either On or Off
● If You Want to Set Left Side Stapling:
Staple
Position
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Corner: Top Left
Double: Top
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Output
Example
LTR
11"x17", LGL, LTRR
LTR
11"x17", LGL, LTRR
Preprinted Paper
Orientation in
paper drawer
Preprinted side:
Face up
Orientation in multipurpose tray/paper deck
Preprinted side:
Face down
Orientation on
the platen glass
Original
Original side:
Face down
Staple position
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Left
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Corner: Top Right
Corner: Top Right
Double: Right
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Either On or Off (Set to 'On'
when paper orientation in the
paper deck/multi-purpose tray/
paper drawer is vertical.)
Either On or Off
Corner: Top Left
Double: Left
Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up
Auto Orientation Setting
16
Appendix
Staple position
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
16-43
● If You Do Not Want to Set the Staple Mode:
Output
Example
Original/
Paper
Orientation,
Settings
LTR
11"x17", LGL
LTR
11"x17", LGL
Preprinted Paper
Orientation in
paper drawer
Preprinted side:
Face up
Orientation in multipurpose tray/paper deck
Preprinted side:
Face down
Orientation on
the platen glass
Original
Original side:
Face down
Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up
Auto Orientation Setting
Either On or Off
Either On or Off
Either On or Off (Set to 'On'
when paper orientation in the
paper deck/multi-purpose tray/
paper drawer is vertical.)
Appendix
16
16-44
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Either On or Off
Index
100Base-TX, 5-3
10Base-T, 5-3
A
Accessing machine from web, 15-7
Activity Report, 16-12
Address Book List, 16-14
AppleTalk, 4-10, 9-2, 9-3
AppleTalk network, 4-5, 9-2
AppleTalk network setup procedures, 9-2
AppleTalk settings, 9-3
Auto Detect, 5-10, 7-3
B
Before using the Remote UI
Enable the Remote UI, 15-3
Specify the network settings, 15-3
Before using this machine, 11-2
Registering sender names, 11-8
Registering the Sending Record, 11-4
Registering the unit’s name, 11-7
Selecting the type of telephone line, 11-3
Setting the date and time, 11-5
Setting the display language, 11-2
Things to do, 11-2
Bindery Remote Printer Mode (RPrinter), 7-3
Booklet Finisher-C1
Specifications, 16-27
BOOTP, 6-4
Breaker
About the breaker, 1-11
Periodic inspection, xxxv
Periodic inspection check sheet, xxxviii
Brightness Adjustment Dial, 1-13
C
Card Reader-C1
Specifications, 16-31
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1
Specifications, 16-22
Checking your network, 4-9
Macintosh network, 4-10
UNIX network, 4-10
Using network with various types of computers, 4-11
Windows network, 4-9
Clear key, 1-13
Color Image Reader Unit-B1
Specifications, 16-21
Color Image Reader Unit-B2
Specifications, 16-22
Communication environment setup, 5-11
Community Name, 5-13
D
Date and time, setting, 11-5
Device Information Communication Log Report, 16-5
Device Information Delivery Destination List, 16-4
DHCP, 6-4
Display contrast dial, 1-13
Display language, setting, 11-2
Displays used in this manual, xi
DNS Dynamic Update, 6-5
DNS Settings, 6-5
Domain Name, 6-6
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1
Specifications, 16-20
Duplexing Unit, 1-12
16
Appendix
Numerics
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, 16-11
Connecting the machine to computer or network
Connecting to network, 5-3
Connecting to USB interface, 5-5
Connecting to an SMB/CIFS Network and Configuring a Shared Folder
Samba (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X), 8-13
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, 8-7
Consumables
Safety instructions, xxxiii
Context, 7-5
Context name, 7-5
Control panel, 5-9, 5-11, 6-3, 6-9, 7-3, 8-3, 9-3
About the control panel, 1-11
Control panel power switch, 1-13
Parts and their functions, 1-13
Power, 1-14, 1-15
Control panel power switch, 1-13, 1-14, 1-15
Copy function, 2-2
Copying, definition, xv
Copy log list, 16-2
Copyright, xix
Copy Tray-J1
Specifications, 16-30
Counter check key, 1-13
E
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings (TCP/IP), 6-25
Edit pen, 1-13
Enabling the Remote UI, 15-3, 15-4
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1
Specifications, 16-23
Error indicator, 1-13
Ethernet Driver Settings, 5-10
Ethernet Type, 5-10
100Base-TX, 5-3
10Base-T, 5-3
EtherTalk, 4-5, 4-10
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1
Specifications, 16-29
Index
16-45
F
Fax Activity Report, 16-13
Fax function, 2-3
Fax Multi TX Report, 16-9
Fax RX Report, 16-10
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report, 16-8
Feeder, 1-11
Fixing Unit’s Upper Cover, 1-12
Forwarding Conditions List, 16-14
Frame Type, 7-3
FTP, 4-6
FTP Print Settings, 6-17
FTP server settings, 6-29
Mac OS X, 6-34
UNIX/Linux, 6-33
G
Gateway Address, 6-4
H
Handling precautions, 1-6
Host Name, 6-6
I
Appendix
16
ID (Log In/Out) key, 1-13
Inner 2 Way Tray-F1
Specifications, 16-30
Inner Finisher-A1
Specifications, 16-23
Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1
Specifications, 16-29
Installation
Installation Space, 16-35
Location and handling, 1-2
Power supply, 1-5
Precautions, 1-2
Safety instructions, xxvii
Interface settings, 5-9
IP Address Settings, 6-4
IPP, 6-18
IPP Print Settings, 6-18
K
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual, xi
M
Macintosh network, 4-10
Main Menu key, 1-13
Main power indicator, 1-13
Main power switch, 1-11, 1-14, 1-15
Main Unit’s Right Cover, 1-11
MEAP Settings, 15-7
Moving machine, 1-6
Multi-Purpose Tray
About the multi-purpose tray, 1-11
N
NDS (Novell Directory Service), 7-3
NDS Pserver, 7-3
NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), 7-3
NetBEUI, 4-9, 8-2
NetWare, 4-4, 7-3
NetWare network setup procedures, 7-2
NetWare Settings, 7-3
Network Environment, 16-34
NPrinter (NDS remote printer mode), 7-3
Numeric keys, 1-13
O
Operations required to use the machine, 2-5
Confirm the following settings, 2-5
Managing the machine from a computer, 2-12
Printing from a computer, 2-11
Sending and Receiving Faxes via the Remote Fax Server, 2-9
Sending data to a file server, 2-8
Sending e-mail/I-faxes, 2-7
Sending faxes from a computer, 2-10
Sending faxes from the machine, 2-9
Using the machine as a scanner, 2-12
Optional equipment and system requirements
Printing or Sending a Fax from a Computer, 4-2
Sending data, 4-6
Using E-Mail/I-Fax, 4-5
Output Paper Tray Guide, 1-11
Output Tray, 1-11
P
L
Laser safety, xviii
Legal notices
Copyright, xix
Disclaimers, xx
Laser safety, xviii
Legal limitations on the usage of your product and the use of images, xxi
Trademarks, xiii
16-46
Line type, setting, 11-3
LocalTalk, 4-5
Log on, 6-29
LPD, 6-2, 6-15
LPD Banner Page, 6-15
LPD Print Settings, 6-15
Index
Paper Deck Unit-B1
Specifications, 16-23
Paper Drawer, 1-11
Paper Drawer’s Right Cover, 1-11
Parts and functions of the main unit
Control Panel, 1-13
External view, 1-10
Internal view, 1-12
Q
Quick Menu key, 1-13
R
RARP, 6-4
Raw, 6-16
RAW Print Settings, 6-16
Registered LDAP Server List, 16-14
Relationship between original orientation and preprinted paper output
chart, 16-42
Remote Fax Settings, 11-9
Client-Side Settings, 11-10
Server-Side Settings, 11-9
Reset key, 1-13
RPrinter, 7-3
S
Safety instructions
Consumables, xxxiii
Handling, xxx
Important safety instructions, xxvii
Installation, xxvii
Maintenance and inspections, xxxii
Other warnings, xxxiv
Power supply, xxix
Samba, 8-13
Sample reports, 16-2
Activity Report, 16-12
Address Book List, 16-14
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, 16-11
Copy log list, 16-2
Device Information Communication Log Report, 16-5
Device information delivery destination list, 16-4
Fax Activity Report, 16-13
Fax Multi TX Report, 16-9
Fax RX Report, 16-10
Fax TX Report/Fax Error TX Report, 16-8
Forwarding Conditions List, 16-14
Print log list, 16-3
Registered LDAP Server List, 16-14
Send Job List, 16-6
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report, 16-7
System Information, 16-16
User’s Data List, 16-15
Scanning, definition, xv
Security Key, 1-11
Sender names, registering, 11-8
Send Function, 2-3
Specifications, 16-32
Sending data, 4-6
Optional equipment requirements, 4-6
System requirements, 4-6
Sending faxes from a computer
Fax configuration, 13-4
Installation, 13-3
System requirements, 13-2
Sending record, registering, 11-4
Send Job List, 16-6
Send TX Report/Send Error TX Report, 16-7
Server Address, 6-20
Service Name, 9-3
Settings/Registration key, 1-13
Setting up computer as file server
SMB/CIFS network, 8-6
TCP/IP network, 6-28
Setup procedures
AppleTalk network, 9-2
NetWare network, 7-2
Network environment, 5-2
SMB/CIFS network, 8-2
TCP/IP network, 6-2
SMB/CIFS, 4-4
SMB/CIFS network, 8-3
SMB/CIFS network setup procedures, 8-2
SMB Server Settings, 8-3
SMS (Service Management System), 15-7
SMTP, 6-25
SNMP Settings, 5-11
Specifications
Booklet Finisher-C1, 16-27
Card Reader-C1, 16-31
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1, 16-22
Color Image Reader Unit-B1, 16-21
Color Image Reader Unit-B2, 16-22
Copy Tray-J1, 16-30
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1, 16-20
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1, 16-23
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1, 16-29
Inner 2 Way Tray-F1, 16-30
Inner Finisher-A1, 16-23
Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1, 16-29
Main unit, 16-18
Network Environment, 16-34
Paper Deck Unit-B1, 16-23
Printer Settings, 16-34
Send Function, 16-32
Staple Finisher-C1, 16-25
Super G3 FAX Board, 16-31
16
Appendix
PING Command, 6-23
Platen Glass, 1-12
Port Number, 6-20
Power supply, xxix, 1-5
Printer Settings, 16-34
Printing, definition, xv
Printing from a computer
Installation, 12-5
Printer configuration, 12-7
Printer Driver, 12-3
System requirements, 12-2
Printing or sending fax from computer, 4-2
Optional Equipment Requirements, 4-2
System Requirements, 4-3
Print log list, 16-3
Print server name, 7-3
Print Service, 7-3
Bindery PServer, 7-3
Bindery Remote Printer Mode (RPrinter), 7-3
NDS PServer, 7-3
NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), 7-3
Processing/Data indicator, 1-13
Protocol, 4-9, 4-11, 6-3, 7-3, 8-3, 9-3
Protocol settings
AppleTalk, 9-3
Confirming TCP/IPv4 settings, 6-23
Confirming TCP/IPv6 settings, 6-24
E-Mail/I-Fax settings (TCP/IP), 6-25
NetWare, 7-3
SMB and WINS settings (SMB/CIFS), 8-3
Startup time settings (TCP/IP), 6-27
TCP/IP Settings (SMB/CIFS), 8-3
TCP/IPv4 settings, 6-3
TCP/IPv6 Settings, 6-9
Proxy Settings, 6-20
Index
16-47
Appendix
16
Spool, 5-16
Staple Finisher-C1
Specifications, 16-25
Start key, 1-13
Status Monitor/Cancel key, 1-13
Stop key, 1-13
Subnet Mask, 6-4
Super G3 FAX Board, 16-31
Switching hub, 6-24, 6-27
Symbols used in this manual, x
System Information, 16-16
System requirements, 15-6
Macintosh, 15-2
SMS, 15-6
Windows, 15-2
V
T
Z
TCP/IP, 4-9, 4-10
TCP/IP network, 4-3, 6-2, 8-6
TCP/IPv4 settings, 6-3
TCP/IP Settings
BOOTP, 6-4
DHCP, 6-4
DNS Dynamic Update, 6-5
DNS Settings, 6-5
FTP Print Settings, 6-17
Gateway Address, 6-4
IPP Print Settings, 6-18
LPD Banner Page, 6-15
LPD Print Settings, 6-15
PING Command, 6-23
Port Number, 6-20
Proxy Settings, 6-20
RARP, 6-4
RAW Print Settings, 6-16
Server Address, 6-20
Subnet Mask, 6-4
Use HTTP, 6-20
TCP/IPv4 Settings, 6-3
TCP/IPv6 Settings, 6-9
Telephone line, selecting the type, 11-3
Test button, 1-11
Toner Cartridge, 1-12
Toner replacement cover, 1-12
Touch panel display
About the touch panel display, 1-13
Touch panel display transition, 5-7
Trademarks, xiii
Zone, 9-3
U
Unit name, registering, 11-7
UNIX network, 4-10
USB Port, 1-13
Use HTTP, 6-20
User’s Data List, 16-15
Using E-Mail/I-Fax, 4-5
Optional equipment requirements, 4-5
System requirements, 4-5
Using network with various types of computers, 4-11
Using the remote scan function
Installation, 14-4
Settings required prior to remote scanning, 14-5
System requirements, 14-3
16-48
Index
Volume Settings Key, 1-13
W
Waste Toner Container, 1-12
WebDAV, 4-8
WebDAV server settings, 6-36
What this machine can do, 2-2
Windows network, 4-9
WINS(Windows Internet Name Service), 8-3
WINS settings, 8-3
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
(See http://www.canon-europe.com/ for details on your regional dealer)
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
FT5-2459 (010)
XXXXXXXXXX
© CANON INC. 2009
PRINTED IN CHINA
Download PDF
Similar pages